Home

User manual

1. E The excom system module rack and the field enclosure have a tight electrical connection The field enclosure is part of the equipotential bonding system The field enclosure must be connected to the equipotential bonding with a diamter of at least 6 mm When a non conducting system enclosure is used the excom module rack must be directly connected to the equipotential bonding E The prerequisite is that the equipotential bonding PA is present between measuring station and field installation When the cable shield is directly positioned onto the integrated shield bus of the excom enclosure the shield bus must be connected with the equipotential bonding wire diameter 24mm The shield ofthe field cables is placed one sided onto the shield buses in the enclosure if shielded field cables are used refer to Figure 76 Isolated shield buses are used to separately lead shield and equipotential bonding The isolated shield buses must not be connected to the system enclosure and thus to the equipotential
2. 110 il 110 110 J 110 4 110 L 110 204 5 350 350 365 365 Figure 87 EG VA 8055 Topview without door 856 800 r 4 t JE S S S S Alt 235 550 350 e S a a e 8 50 m a 120 80 li CEN 4 40 150 D301266 0113 excom 209 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area Figure 88 EG VA 8055 Sideview with door Flange plate for the EG VA 8055 Figure 89 M16 flange plate left for EG VA 8055 210 F 256 32 r 78 96 5 46 7 9 20 3 58 x T 6 Ri d I 690090 3 oL bh OOOO i 999090 37 o99000 4 606000 110 i 110 AS e D301266 0113 excom Instructions concerning the explosion protection certificates Industr A Figure 90 M16 flange plate right for EG VA 8055 288 Ww N 96 1f 9 20 3 60 x peste de EN 600000009000 60000009000 6000000000 6000000000 SOOODCOOOOHTE t o o 9 o 32 25 d 160 g 110 110 110 365 380 gt aim n
3. 550 350 d p He S D qp m 120 ha AH Y L 40 H 150 206 D301266 0113 excom Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area Industr A Figure 84 EG VA 6555 Sideview with door Flange plate for the EG VA 6555 Figure 85 M16 flange plate for EG VA 6555 9 6 5 dw aie eas r p e m 9 34 Ho 9060000000000000 o o06000000000000020 m 224 59 46 G000000000000020 160 Lo 06060000000000000 37 o 90600600000000090 m i 4 906606060000000000 72r fy 147 5 il 147 5 147 5 I 147 5 55 D301266 0113 excom 207 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area System enclosure EG VA 8055 800 x 550 x 260 mm Ex e Il stainless steel enclosure with hinge jointed door and window visible range 570 x 80 mm for housing the excom module carrier Special characteristics Base body with bent drip rail 4 welded on outer plates 2profile rails C profile on rubber stops to stabilize the module racks 2CU rails nickel plated as shield rails for applying the cable shields M6 grounding bolts internally welded on M8 grounding bolts externally welded on Bl The flange plate and the front door are delivered with the base body Note o The M8 grounding bolt
4. Bit position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA 1 1 2 3 014 Connection figures Figure 43 Terminal terminal configuration connection possibilities assignment M 11 t A0401Ex amp 0 4 20 mA N i channel 1 Ji ERE a A x sls N N 0 4 20 mA Ji i channel 2 EN J amp 0 4 20 mA 32 I channel 3 EN i 41 V 0 4 20 mA A DS BBE Ji channel 4 EN D301266 0113 excom 105 excom system components Parameters Note Please take the bit assignment AO401Ex page 273 Table 73 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AO401Ex Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or deactivated monitoring off with the help of channels In case of a short circuit the respective channel LED is red Wire breakage on Wire breakage monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated with the help of channels In case of a wire breakage the respective channel LED is red Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The max value is 22 mA The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4
5. etc Table 25 Error code No Meaning Special error codes of the 16 ROM error gateway diagnosis 17 RAM error 18 EEPROM error 19 Starting up after a cold start 20 Different configuration with redundancy 21 Different firmware with redundancy 22 Error function of the internal bus CAN error 23 Error function of the internal bus passive CAN error 24 Error in the power supply module 1 25 Error in the power supply module 2 26 Starting up after Watchdog Reset 27 Redundancy switch has taken place 28 Redundant gateway is missing 29 Redundant gateway is not ready 30 Redundant gateway has an error 31 Redundant gateway has no PROFIBUS DP communication D301266 0113 excom 65 excom system components Parameters Table 26 Parameters Gateway 66 Parameter name Value Meaning Power frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz filter to suppress power supply 60 Hz caused superimposed interferences in signal cables Analog data format Status MSB The status bit of an analog input channel can be Status LSB mapped into the process input data of the No status channel and the position MSB or LSB can be determined Status MSB Status bit at bit position 2 Status LSB Status bit at 2 No status Measurement value without status bit Module rack MT8 MT8 8 I O modules MT16 MT16 16 I O modules MT24 MT24 24 I O modules Redundancy mode off Selection of redundancy type Line redundanc
6. Figure 9 Converter sub rack MT PPS A Slots for 115 230 VAC converters B Integrated filters Dimensional drawing of the converter sub rack MT PPS Figure 10 MT PPS 260 235 D301266 0113 excom 33 excom system components 3 2 7 Technical data of the module racks converter sub racks Table 6 Technical data of the module racks converter sub racks 34 Type code MT16 2G MT16 3G MT24 3G MT PPS Connections Bus SUB D Miniature 9 2 2 2 pole Power supply voltage 6 Ex e double screw terminals Supply 6 4 4 4 Ex e double screw terminals Connection cross section 1 4 mm inflexible or 1 2 5 mm with wire end sleeve Field devices per module 4 x 4 terminals Connection cross section 0 25 1 5 mm with wire end sleeve without plastic sleeve Slots AC DC converter DC power 2 2 2 2 supply module power supply unit Gateway max expansion 2 2 2 l O module max 16 16 24 expansion Possible settings Bus address 3 coded 2 coded rotary Rotary switches switches Values of the EC type examination certificate Ex approval PTB 00 ATEX 2194 U PTB 00 ATEX 2091 X Marking Il2 1 G Exebib ia IIC Il 2G Exeqll T4 General information Protection class IP20 Ambient temperatur
7. Figure 18 Connection to the E module rack MT16 2G Redundant supply PSD24Ex PSD24Ex M OCC ih ty aJ cde 24VDC f PES a 24VDC PE The following components are needed E Module rack MT16 3G or Module rack MT24 3G with E 2x Power supply module PSM24 3G Figure 19 To Connection to the module rack MT16 3G or rather MT24 3G f Redundant supply PSM24 ll 4j EST 4 46 D301266 0113 excom Supply of the excom system Industr A 115 230 VAC supply optionally redundant The following examples show circuits on the converter sub rack MT PPS The two AC DC converters are connected parallel to one or two separate voltage sources The following components are needed E Converter sub rack MT PPS with 1 x AC DC converter PPSA230Ex or rather PPSA115Ex and E Module rack MT16 2G with 1 x Power supply unit PSD24Ex or 5 Module rack MT16 3G or Module rack MT24 3G with 1 x Power supply module PSM24 3G Figure 20 Connection on the sub rack MT PPS redundant supply O O PPSA PPSA VAC N i i PE L 1 VAC N PE p ese Note o D301266 0113 excom For internal voltage stabilization the power supply unit filter PS F24Ex is mounted onto the terminals of the 24 VDC su
8. STSCI Gall CLL eI Re asstentsisvacsustarcaisxacuveatdastentaxiteadusssntsycrtevcutsascesesbarvesteotduaveslarcshdaavsstustentd aeantaenidatrenedtecriestiee AIH41Ex analog input module 4 channel Configuration and data volume ss Error message via the status bit of the data telegram E Floating point format of the HART variable 0 sssscssssscesssscessseecssseecessseccssssecessseccsnseecsnsseecsnsesssecesssessnssecenseecesnseesenseeees Meas rement rp Connection gcc EI Cite Channel specific module diagnosis Function of the LEDs Technical data eene AOHAOEx analog output module 4 CHANNE eecsesscsssssssecsseecssecssseccseecsueecsnecssscessessssecessesssscesseecsascesseecsaeessueecsneessneeesneessaees Configuration and data volume sssscsssescsssescesseescssscecssssecessseecsseeecsssescesssecessseecsnssecessecessseceesuseessssecsnsecesseecsnsseecsnseesenseeees Floating point format of the HART variables oo sssssssssccssssscsssescessssccssssecessscecsnseecssscecessseecsnseecsnsecsnssecsnssecessescesnseesenseeees urine Connection figures m icti D301266 0113 excom 25 excom system components 3 10 3 10 1 3 10
9. eter tenen ttenneetnntittnnnitete tantes 212 U l examination of the connection of intrinsically safe bus nodes fieldbus participants 213 Evaluation of the external inductance resistance ratio L R or rather of the capacities C 214 Shield for the segment coupler SC1QEX ssssssssccsssecsesecsseccesccesscccsscccssccesnecesnccessecessecsnsecsnsecsssecencesseessssesusecsessessnsessnseseasessnese 217 Shielding designs for RS485 IS sete eren trei iren sivecteavesesuiventedeachauhdasbeedosvontdsbocedesvoedsbocedpssecotbosedipeese 219 D301266 0113 excom 191 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area 5 1 General safety instructions Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by explosion The national and international rules and regulations must be followed for all work performed on the device and for its intended use in explosive areas The operator is responsible here excom provides on the terminals marked blue current circuits with the ignition protection class Intrinsic Safety for the protection from explosion in environments with gas and dust per EN 60079 11 The intrinsically safe current circuits are certified by authorized test agencies and approved for use in the respective countries Note o The correct and safe operation of the excom system requires that it is properly transported and stored in its orig
10. Ni Profibus Link Y interface excom iE SR EEEHHHE pirni D301266 0113 excom Segment coupler OC 11Ex 4 3 8 Technical data for OC11Ex 2G 2 and OC11Ex 3G 2 Industr A Table 156 Technical data type code OC11Ex 2G 2 OC11Ex 3G 2 Ident No 6890427 6890428 Supply voltage 18 32 VDC 18 32 VDC Current consumption lt 100 mA lt 100 mA Transmission rate 9 6 kBit s 1 5 Mbit s self recognizing Galvanic isolation PROFIBUS DP contra supply voltage per EN 60079 11 60V 60V Ex marking of the device PTB 05 ATEX 2051 X Il 2 G Exe mb ib ib op is IIC T4 PTB 05 ATEX 2052 X II 2 G Ex ib op is IIC PTB 05 ATEX 2053 X I 3 G Ex nA II T4 Ex limit values per PNO working group RS485 IS U 4 2 V l 4 8 A Enclosure Dimensions mm 72 x 105 5 x 31 72 x 105 5 x 31 Enclosure material anodized aluminum anodized aluminum Material cover FR4 gray FR4 gray Protection class IP20 IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C 20 70 C D301266 0113 excom 189 excom bus components 190 D301266 0113 excom 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 5 4 4 5 4 5 5 4 6 5 4 7 5 5 Industr A excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area General safety instructions 192 Correct Operation c cccccc
11. D301266 0113 excom Segment coupler SC 12Ex 4 2 9 technical data of the SC12Ex Industr A Table 151 Technical data Type code SC12Ex Supply voltage 18 32 VDC Current consumption lt 200 mA Transmission rate 9 6 kBit s 1 5 Mbit s self recognizing Galvanic isolation PROFIBUS DP contra supply voltage 250V per EN 60079 11 Intrinsically safe PROFIBUS DP contra PROFIBUS 60V DP per EN 60079 11 Intrinsically safe PROFIBUS DP 60V contra supply voltage per EN 60079 11 Between the two intrinsically safe PROFIBUS DP 10V segments per EN 60079 11 Ex marking of the device Il 2 GD Ex ib IIC Ex limit values per PNO working group RS485 IS Up 4 2 V l 4 8 A Enclosure Dimensions mm 142 x 105 x 32 Enclosure material anodized aluminum Material cover FR4 gray blue Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C D301266 0113 excom 181 excom bus components 4 3 Segment coupler OC11Ex 4 3 1 General information about OC11Ex The coupler system sends the bus signals via fiber optic cables from a safe area to an explosion hazardous area In the safe area the coupler OC11Ex 3G 2 accepts the PROFIBUS DP signals at a standard RS485 interface and sends the signals to an intrinscially safe fiber optic cable The communication partner OC12Ex 2G 2 can be installed in Zone 1 and co
12. 274 AIHAOEX 275 Lir 276 AIH41EX 4H 277 AIH41EX 1H 278 AIH41EX 8H M 279 AOHA4OEX 4H 280 pius 1H e 281 AOHA4OEX 8H 282 lin 283 TI4OEX a 285 TIA TEX qu 287 DF20EX F m 288 DF20EX P 290 D301266 0113 excom 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 Industr A General information Documentation CONCEPT cccccccccccccsccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsscccccccccccccccccssccccccccceccceccceccccsscccscccscccscccscccees 14 Explanations of the symbols that were used cccccccccccscsscccccssssccccsecccscccccsccsscscsscssssccccssssssscseccssccees 14 General InstructiOns cccccccccscccsrcsccccccccsccccccccccccccccccccceccccescccccccecccsccccscccccccccsscccsccesccccccccessssccsecs 15 Intended sexesceeraeniaeM nte R
13. activated secondary variables D301266 0113 excom 115 excom system components AIH40Ex 8H Note Please take the bit assignment AIHAOEx 8H page 277 In this configuration the module also sends 8 HART variables to the cyclic data communication Table 86 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AIH40Ex 8H Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Wire breakage on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The max value is 21 mA The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 Channel 1 SV1 SV4 on off Activation deactivation of the secondary variable Channel 2 SV1 SV4 on off SV1 4 of Channel 1 4 Channel 3 SV1 SV4 on off Note Avoid activation of more than 8 secondary Channel 4 SV1 SV4 on off variables The module only displays the first 8 activated secondary variables Substitue value strategy Depending on the measurement range setting the following substitute values are set when an error occurs Table 87 Measurement range Substitute values Substitute values for AIH40Ex Oto 20 mA Min value
14. Non Ex area Ex area RS485 IS DP connector DP connector with integrated terminating resistor 4 2 3 Redundant interface and supply voltage on the SC12bEx The coupler provides a standard RS485 PROFIBUS DP interface and two intrinsically safe RS485 IS PROFIBUS DP interfaces A line redundancy Line redundancy hardware page 226 can be done with one device The communication channels are equal in each segment If no redundancy is needed two segments with 31 participants can be connected to one coupler The coupler can be fed redundantly The two operating voltage inputs are decoupled with the help of diodes Load distribution depends on how high the operating voltage is The operating voltage range is 18 32 VDC Use a power supply module with Uy 60 VDC Depending on the transmission speed the SC12Ex supports transmission distances of up to 1200 m A shielding design must be realized for the PROFIBUS in order to have error free communication 4 2 4 Male connector and bus termination on the SC12Ex 176 For RS485 connection standard PROFIBUS DP male connectors are used For active termination these male connectors usually have an integrated connectable resistance combination e g D9T RS485 Ident No 6890942 For intrinsically safe R 485 IS connection use the PROFIBUS DP male connector D9T RS485IS
15. Ensurea reliable isolation of the extra low voltage for the 24 volt supply Use only power supply devices which meet the requirements per IEC 60 364 4 41 or rather HD 384 4 41 S2 VDE 0100 Section 410 E Fluctuations or deviations of the mains voltage from the nominal value should not exceed the tolerance limits specified in the technical data otherwise malfunctions and dangerous states may occur Emergency Off equipment per IEC EN 60 204 1 must remain in effect in all operating modes of the automation equipment Release of the Emergency Off equipment must not cause a restart Built in devices for enclosures or cabinets must only be operated and maintained when installed tabletop devices or portables only when the housing is closed Measures must be taken to ensure that an interrupted program can be restarted according to specifications following voltage drops and failures Dangerous operating conditions even short term should not occur as a result if necessary force Emergency Off E External measures must be taken at locations where failures of the automation equipment may cause damage to persons and property these external measures must ensure or rather force safe operation even when failures or interferences occur e g by means of independent limit switches mechanical locks etc The electrical installation must be completed according to relevant specifications e g cable cross sections fuses connection of earth con
16. Note The module sends an error message via the status bit of the data telegram when an error occurs The status bit is set when an infringement of the measurement range and a cable error occur Thus a consistent error evaluation of the measurement value can be done D301266 0113 excom 141 excom system components Measurement range Table 120 Measurement Value Resolu Not valid when an Substitute Scaling of the range display tion infringement of the value for wrong analog values measurement range measurement occurs value Overflow Underflow min max 75 75 mV 7500 22500 5uV 75 mV 75 mV 0 32767 1200 1200 mV 3000 27000 100 uV 1 200 mV 41 200 mV 0 32767 0 3000K 0 30000 0 1 K sensor specific 0 32767 0 30Q 0 30000 1Q 0Q 30 Q 0 32767 0 300 Q 0 30000 10Q 0Q 300 Q 0 32767 0 3000 Q 0 30000 100 Q 0Q 3000 Q 0 32767 Table 121 Sensor inK In C inK In C pees rdi Pt100 IEC 73 200 1123 850 temperature Pt200 IEC 73 200 1123 850 iun Pt500 IEC 73 200 1123 850 Pt1000 IEC 73 200 1123 850 Pt100 JIS 73 200 1123 850 Pt1000 IS 73 200 1123 850 Pt100 SAMA 73 200 1123 850 Pt1000 SAMA 73 200 1123 850 Pt100 GOST 73 200 1373 1100 Ni100 213 60 523 250 Cu100 223 50 473 200 Type B 273 0 2093 1820 Type C 273 0 2588 2320 Type D 273 0 2588 2320 Type E 3 270 1273 1000 Type J 63 210 1473 1200 Type K 3 270 1645
17. Substitue value strategy min value max value last valid value Depending on the parameterization the min value the max value or the last valid value is set The min value is 0 K 273 15 C The max value is 3276 70 K 3003 55 C Cable resistance Basis 0 Q Basis 0 5 Q Basis 1 0 Q Basis 1 5 Q Basis 2 0 Q Basis 2 5 Q Basis 3 0 Q Basis 3 5 Q Basis 4 0 Q Basis 4 5 Q Basis 5 0 Q Basis 5 5 Q Basis 6 0 Q Basis 6 5 Q Basis 7 0 Q Basis 7 5 Q Setting of cable resistance Line resistance and basis are subtracted from linearization for 2 wire connection D301266 0113 excom Modules for temperature measuring Industr A o Note With the 2 wire technology the cable resistance scews the result of linearization Channel specific module diagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the TIA1bEx devices support the following channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 Table 131 Error code No Meaning Error codes Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage 7 Upper limit value exceeded 8 Lower limit value has not been reached Specific 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configurat
18. TP Identification of the excom componennts ee ee eee eee eee eee esee eese ee esee esee esses esse es esees osse osse osse ss ssese 253 D301266 0113 excom 251 Service 7 1 7 1 1 252 Service and maintenance A Attention Possible device defects caused by damage The operator of electrical installations in explosion hazardous areas must ensure that an authorized inspector with electrical know how conducts routine checks for proper condition e g tears on enclosure staining on modules caused by excessive temperature and damage leaking seals and tightness of terminals and bolts Prior to replacing or removing unpluggable individual parts the operating device must be switched off Only approved original parts from TURCK must be used A Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by explosion If a part of the the excom system on which explosion protection depends on is being repaired the part must only be operated again after an authorized inspector has checked the equipment per the explosion protection requirements has issued a certificate or has affixed a test mark to the equipment Testing through an authorized inspector can be omitted when the operating equipment is routine tested prior to a new start up by the manufacturer and when the successful routine test has been certified by affixing an approval mark to the operating equipment Routine maintenance o Note
19. 3 Enclosure Protection class siniseen 201 Error codes manufacturer specific esee 243 iPROFIBUS DP arret erint tn then 242 excom cw 18 27 Performance characteristics eee 18 SystemistrUctUre cernentes 173 F fiberoptic cables 5 tete Enea 182 F riction amp arthi siis reor n erinnern rmn nns 3 D301266 0113 excom Industr A I Intended USE tnea derer sacr pee PERLE Seer Ud 15 L LEDs REIs5qe 90 SAJAT EX q ue M 96 E klBs dq 102 AIHAOEXx AIHATEX s eese 118 129 EJ ge iannau aiena EN Eana 107 zip J P aa aiana 138 SIDEQOEX IE Mn 159 Pls e 163 SIDIZOEX is cioe cest isi a aa E sdxnuu E xa ER ERR EE 78 DMBQEX dqe T 73 amp DOMOTEX inii extera ea dede Era a d 84 GDPEIS iinarte ai 56 63 S INAMUR NEAA siaina a aiaa 19 SOC EX or gaen r 186 SCI2EX a 178 0 qM 147 153 M Measurement value display AIHAOEx AIH4 1 EX eee 123 133 Zhu 2 qe n 141 150 Modifications ccccceececeeceaeeaneeseeeeceececeeseaaeeaeeseeseseeeeeees 192 Module bersicht 2 3 2 rob beth te cite teer Rn sen 21 Module rack NVEISIONS csiccusixidicdwt esti gexva tata videre a ra dh V d 20 29 Modules SOVeIVIeW i5 scies exhi eux raa aon e dec d Van aD R
20. 6 4 3 Redundancy mode Line Redundancy If the parameter Redundancy Mode is set to Line Redundancy excom also operates with line redundancy If communication between the master and the primary gateway is interrupted the redundant gateway of the excom station controls the communication In this case however Communication compatibility of the redundant gateway is tested By activating the parameter Address Offset on and the input of an Address Offset Value other that 0 the redundant gateway receives a excom internal virtual bus address basis address of the excom station Address Offset Value Based on the set virtual bus address the redundant gateway responds to the polling of all non configured slaves of the network with the help of the PROFIBUS master and sends a receipt With this receipt the communication readiness of the redundant gateway is tested w TTS TN 34 Line redundancy Ae 715 PRU AST Parameters Value fshex fotation parameters pcc x EH Device specific parameters H arid frequency 50Hz LE analog data Format status MSB 2 backplane MT18 16 I O modules 2 redundancy mode amp power supply single HEJ cyclic data select 0 HE HCIR active off LIE HCIR WCBC factor base x 1 HCIR WCBC base x 100ms 5 L address offset lt _ enale gt HIE address offset value 1 HIE can redundancy on HIE SF2
21. lt 50 Q only at Live zero Wire breakage 2 15 V only at Live zero Resolution 13 bit Linearity error lt 0 1 96 from end value Temperature drift lt 0 005 K Rise time fall time lt 50 ms 10 90 Ex approval PTB 02 ATEX 2051 Marking II2 1 G Exib ia IIC TA I 1 D Ex ia IIIC Ex max values field circuits Ex ia IIC IIB Open circuit voltage U lt 22 1 V Short circuit current lt 93 mA Max power P 640 mW Characteristic curve trapezoid Max internal inductance L lt 0 22 mH Max internal capacity C lt 1 1 nF IIC IIB Max external inductance L 1 78 mH 1 78 mH Max external capacity C 100 nF 500 nF General information Galvanic isolation to bus and for supply Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 at 55 C per EN 60068 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 D301266 0113 excom 139 excom system components 3 10 Modules for temperature measuring 3 10 1 TI40Ex temperature module 4 channel Figure 50 TI40Ex 140 The temperature module TI40Ex connects 2 3 and 4 wire temperature resistors of types Pt100 Pt200 Pt500 Pt1000 Ni100 and Cu100 as well as thermo elements of types B E D J K L N R S T and U It can also be used to measure small voltages 75 75 mV 1 2 1 2 V
22. Note o The power supply unit PSD24Ex can be hot swapped By loosening at least one screw the power supply unit is switched off For correct operation all screws must be tightened D301266 0113 excom Supply of the excom system Mounting of the power supply units PSD24Ex to the backplane MT16 2G The screws for mounting the power supply units PSD24Ex to the backplane MT16 2G must be screwed tight so that the power supply units become operable For correct mounting please tighten the screws as follows 1 top left 2 bottom right 3 top right 4 bottom left Figure 15 Order in which to tighten the screws 1 Oe 3 o ol o ol 49 o2 Technical data PSD24Ex Table 9 Type code PSD24Ex Technical data PSD24Ex Supply voltage external 19 5 32 V DC ripple Wop 10 Power consumption lt 665 W Power output lt 60W Ex approval PTB 00 ATEX 2193 Marking of device Il 2 G Ex eb ib ia IIC Rated voltage U 60V LED displays Operating readiness 1x green Supply 1 x green General information Galvanic isolation on all sides Protection class IP50 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity lt 95 at 55 C per EN 60068 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 Mounting Flange 4 x M4 screws Dimensions B x H x T mm 45 x 155 x 106 D301266 0113 excom 41 excom system com
23. measurement range off 4 20 mA Dead zero without HART status request Wire on 4 20 mA breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 0 to the host system off 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system on 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request HART diagnosis active Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system excom sends two different HART error codes to the PLS Error code 30 and error code 31 Error code 30 The HART variables are invalid only information is issued that the HART device status is erroneous Error code 31 The HART variables are invalid the HART communication is erroneous Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 D301266 0113 excom 113 excom system components AIH40Ex 1H Note Please take the bit assignment AIH40Ex 1H page 276 In this configuration the module also sends 1 HART variable to the cyclic data communication Table 84 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AIH40Ex 1H Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivate
24. 20000 equates to 0 to 20 mA status SB Status Bit settable via the gateway parameters n 17 2 3 or 4 Error message via the status bit of the data telegram Note o The module sends depending on the parameterized measurement range 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA an error message via the status bis of the data telegram when an error occurs 110 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Industr A Floating point format of the HART variable The HART variable are displayed as follows Table 80 Byte Meaning Floating point format n Prefix Exponent 28 27 2 2 24 2 2 2 n4 1 Exponent Mantissa 2 23 2 23 2 25 2 27 n 2 Mantissa 28 2 270 27 2 23 214 275 n 3 Mantissa 276 217 278 219 2 20 2 22 2 3 Mapping of the input data The input data of the module and the HART variables are mapped as follows This case here involves a module with 8 cyclic HART variables Table 81 Word No Content Input data 1 Word 2 Bytes mapping 1 Input channel 1 2 Input channel 2 3 Input channel 3 4 Input channel 4 5 6 HART Variable 1 7 8 HART Variable 2 9 10 HART Variable 3 11 12 HART Variable 4 13 14 HART Variable 5 15 16 HART Variable 6 17 18 HART Variable 7 19 20 HART Variable 8 A The HART variables are displayed in the Floating Point data format D301266 0113 excom 11
25. 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 10 Connection of intrinsically safe field current circuits tese tenente nnt tte nnn ttts notis nons tts nonis Regulations for use in Zone 1 Zone 2 and in the safe area etes ttes tts ttes tente ttsnt ttes ttto sta Instructions for installatiOn ssi ubere ere tet deep cede eee bet deep rele eb tta deberse osea te Unas Connection of the power supply seeccsesccseecssescssseecsscccssccsstecssccessccesseecsusessuscesnscessscessecensccssseessscesssccsuscessseessnecesuecesecesseesnseestees Connection of the cables eerte Connection of the power supply to the PSD24Ex Connection of the power supply to the PSM24 3G sss Connection of the power supply to the PPSA230Ex or the PPSA115Ex Equipotential bonding and shielding of the field current circuits D General requirements for equipotential bonding cecsssssssssccsssecseccssecssneccssecesseceseecsscccssccessccesscessccsnseesnsessneesnseesnsestes Use of the system encloSUres soie Eee tut a ie edi aca t ele epatis System enclosures EG VA 4655 460 x 550 x 260 mm ou csesssssseccssesseccsscsnecesccsssccssessecsucessecsseesseceseesscenseesecneceneeessesaes Dimensional drawing to EG VA 4655 eeeteeenntennnt tente tennntten tento ttttn tete to tte not tteno ttes tten stets ttenocseea 203
26. As far as not explicitly stated in the device specific instructions the approval expires when the device is opened when repairs are made and when the device is interfered with by a person other than the authorized inspector or the manufacturer Type and extensiveness of the maintenance can be found in the respective national regulations e g IEC EN 60079 17 The time limits for the service and maintenance intervals are to be set in such a way that expected damage to the installation can be found in a timely manner Within the scope of service and maintenance check the following cables for tightness cable screws for tightness enclosure for visible damage seal between enclosure and cover wetness inside enclosure adherence to acceptable temperatures correct function D301266 0113 excom Identification of the excom components Industr A 7 1 2 Repairs Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by explosion Danger through incorrect maintenance repair explosion protection is no longer guaranteed Only TURCK is allowed to repair the device 7 1 3 Cleaning Cleaning with a cloth broom vacuum cleaner or similar Use mild non abrasive non scratching cleaning solutions when cleaning Never use aggressive cleaning solutions or solvents 7 1 4 Disposal The excom components must be disposed off per the guideline 2002 96 EG WEEE and separated from normal trash 7 2 Identification of the ex
27. Connection layer for the Ex i field devices MINI COMBICON Slots for 2 gateways Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP page 225 Slots for max 16 I O modules Grounding bolt m ono IQT Dimensional drawing of the module rack MT16 2G Figure 4 MT16 2G 30 440 r 413 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 oo000000000090000 aciineieaineenmieeeni aceneeaeeenonenn oo000000090090090 aceieieaneenmeeen o000000000009090 aciineieneeenenmeni oo00000000000090 aiineieneeeneneean oo0000000000009d piincieieeenieeenin 0000000000000000 acnnaeanooneoni o000000000009000 aciineieeneeenenmenn o000900000000090 aciineieeeeneeeain aceeeneaeeenonenn oo00900009000090 aceieieaneenoeen 0000000000000000 aoonaeenooeneoni 0000000000000000 aoonnaeanoeneoni 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 aoanaeanoeneoni 0000000000000000 ociineieeneeneoemen 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 aconaeae
28. declaration Marking 9I 2 1GD G Ex ib ia IIC T4 Max values terminal connection 1 to 4 Max output voltage U lt 6 6 V Max output current 2 1 mA Max output power P lt 3 5 mW Characteristic curve linear Max internal inductance L negligible Max internal capacity C negligible Max external inductance IIC IIB capacity Lo Co Ly mH C uF C uF 2 0 2 11 1 0 2 3 12 0 5 2 73 15 0 2 3 19 Displays Operating readiness 1 x green red Status error 4 x yellow red General information Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity lt 95 96 at 55 C per IEC 60069 2 Vibration and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 D301266 0113 excom 97 excom system components 3 8 3 AI43Ex analog input module 4 channel Figure 41 Analog input module Al43Ex 98 razez i AME v The analog input module Al43Ex connects the potentiometers with 3 or 4 wire technology When 3 wire potentiometers are used a bridge must be set on the Ex i connection terminals on the module rack Resistance measurements the evaluation of potentiometers with 2 wire connection is possible The module has 4 channels to access 3 wire or 4 wire potentiometers The channels are galvanically isolated from each other from the supply voltage as well as the internal b
29. field circuits Ex ia IIC IIB Open circuit voltage U lt 22 1V Short circuit current lt 93 mA Max power P lt 640 mW Characteristic curve trapezoid Max internal inductance L lt 0 22 mH Max internal capacity C lt 1 1 nF IIC IIB Max external inductance L 1 78 mH 1 78 mH Max external capacity C 100 nF 500 nF General information Galvanic isolation to bus and for supply Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 at 55 C per EN 60069 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 D301266 0113 excom 119 excom system components 3 9 2 AIH41Ex analog input module 4 channel Figure 46 Analog input module AIH41Ex ri Ex SS EL The analog input module AIH41Ex is used to connect intrinsically safe 4 wire transducers passive input non feeding transmitter active The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus can be used in connection with excom in Zone 1 The ignition protection class of the inputs is Ex ia IIC Note The inputs are not galvanically isolated from each other When connecting the fieldbus please take into consideration that all inputs must have a common mass potential The resolution is 14 bit which means the analog value of 0 21 mA is digitalized as a number between O and 16383 For simple presentati
30. 01 0 1 s 10 2 6 s 11 29 2 s 6 7 Connection 00 2 wire 0 Q basis 01 2 wire 8 Q basis 01 3 wire 11 4 wire D301266 0113 excom 289 Addendum parameters A 24 DF20ExF Table 216 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No DF20Ex F 0 0 A1 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 A2 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 2 A3 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 3 A4 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 4 B1 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 5 B2 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 6 B3 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 7 B4 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 0 A Measurement cycle 0 300 ms 0 1 96 resolution 1 lt 50 ms 1 96 resolution 1 A De chattering 0 off Control inputs 1 50 ms 2 3 A Detection of the direction 00 forward f 4 kHz 01 host controlled f 4 kHz 10 Terminal f 4 kHz 11 Terminal auto f 1 25 kHz 4 5 A Substitute value output 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 7 A Substitute value input 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 290 D301266 0113 excom DF20Ex F Industr A Table 216 Forts Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No DF20Ex F 2 0 A1 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 1 A2 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 2 A3 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 3 A4 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 4 5 reserved 00 6 7
31. 20 mA Measurement range 0 20 mA Depending on parameterization the measurement 4 20 mA range is set to 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA Depending on the measurement range the following substitute values are set when an error occurs Table 74 Measurement range Substitute values Substitute values for AO401Ex Oto 20mA Min value 0 mA Max value 22 mA 4 to 20 mA Min value 3 6 mA Max value 22 mA 106 D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Industr A Channel specific module diagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the AO401Ex module supports channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 Table 75 Error code No Meaning Error codes Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage Specific 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent Function of the LEDs Table 76 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for the slot green Correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data green blinking fast Module is configured but the master does not send output data Channel off No channel error red Channel er
32. 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA status without Bit position of the measurement value 0 10000 equates to 0 to 10 V status SB Status Bit settable via the gateway parameters 1 1 2 3 or4 D301266 0113 excom 93 excom system components Connection figures The input module Al41Ex has passive inputs to connect to 4 wire transducers The transducer must be fed externally The following figure shows the selectable connection of transducers to the current or rather voltage input of the module Figure 40 Terminal assignment Al41Ex The analog input is passive 94 terminal configuration i V T e sal N zx eae Ac connection channel 1 voltage current alternatively m um J 7 i U Ji i JV BEBE N wo N N 31 32 33 34 channel 2 channel 3 Ji JV BH ay AT A room on es A R channel 4 D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Industr A Parameters Note Please take the bit assignment Al41Ex page 271 Table 58 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for Al41Ex Cable monitoring on Cable monitoring is activated or deactivated off Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max val
33. Channel 4 AOH40Ex 4H Note Please take the bit assignment AOH40Ex 4H page 282 In this configuration the module also sends 4 HART variables to the cyclic data communication and a standard 8 byte to the channels 1 to 4 Table 112 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AOH40Ex 4H Cable monitoring on Cable monitoring is activated or deactivated off Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The max value is 21 mA The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 Channel 1 SV1 SV4 on off Activation deactivation of the secondary variable Channel 2 SV1 SV4 on off SV1 4 of Channel 1 4 Channel 3 SV1 SV4 on off Note Avoid activation of more than 4 secondary Channel 4 SV1 SV4 on off variables The module only displays the first 4 activated secondary variables 136 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules AOH40Ex 8H Industr A Note o Please take the bit assignment AOH40Ex 8H page 284 In this configuration the module also sends 8 HART variables to the cyclic data communication Table 113 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AOHATEx 8H Cable monitoring on Cable monitoring is activated or deactivated off Substitue v
34. Ident No 6890944 This male connector also has a connectable termination resistance to terminate the network D301266 0113 excom Segment coupler SC 12Ex 4 2 5 Baud rate setting via the rotary switch on the SC12Ex Industr A Table 147 Baud rate and rotary switch position on the SC12Ex Rotary switch position Baud rate Max segment length m Position 0 automatic baud rate recognition Position 1 9 6 kBaud 1200 Position 2 19 2 kBaud 1200 Position 3 45 45 kBaud 1200 Position 4 93 75 kBaud 1200 Position 5 187 5 kBaud 1000 Position 6 500 kBaud 400 Position 7 1 5 MBaud 200 Position 8 not assigned Position 9 not assigned 4 2 6 Converting the RS485 signal into the RS485 IS Ex i signal with the SC12Ex The PROFIBUS DP interface in the explosion hazardous area must meet the requirements for Intrinsic Safety Since excom can be operated in Zone 1 and the requirement exists to separate the gateway from the bus during operation the RS485 IS Ex i layer is used here The interface is designed per PNO guideline 2 262 RS485 IS Galvanic isolation between the segments is guaranteed with the SC12Ex The data that are received from the RS485 interface are sent to the interface RS485 IS a and or to RS485 IS b The delay time is 11 bit periods The data that are received from the RS485 IS a and or the R 485 IS b are sent to the interface RS485 The intrinsically safe inter
35. Industr A The internal resolution of the module is 16 Bit However the resolution is reduced to 15 Bit for transmission to PROFIBUS DP The analog input value is displayed as a number between 0 and 32767 The temperature value is represented as value in 1 10 Kelvin When converting into C an offset of 273 15 must be taken into consideration Table 118 Input byte Output byte Type Configuration Configuration of the TI40Ex 8 TI40Ex Input module The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the input word e g of the first channel Table 119 Bit position of the input word of the n th channel Bit assignment of the input word Bitl5 14 13 12 11 10 9 817 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bito SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 30000 equates to 0 to 3000 K Bit position of the measurement value 0 30000 equates to 0 to 3000 K SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 30000 equates to 0 to 3000 K SB Status Bit Q 1 2 3 or 4 The numerical value 0 30000 represents 0 to 3000 K Kelvin For conversion into Celsius C the following formula is valid 0 C 273 15 K From the numerical value the temperature can be calculated into Celsius C with the following formula Numerical value 2731 5 Temperature in C C 10 Error message via status bit of the data telegram
36. Specific Cable error Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown Function of the LEDs 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent Table 61 LED LED diagnosis Behavior Function Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for the slot green Correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data Channel off No channel error red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present 96 D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Technical data Industr A Table 62 Technical data Al41Ex Type code AI41Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 1W Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Number of channels 4 channel Input circuits intrinsically safe per EN 60079 11 0 4 20 mA Overcontrol 222mA Undercontrol IA 3 6 mA Short circuit lA 5 V only with Live zero Wire breakage lt 2 mA only with Live zero Resolution 14 bit Linearity error lt 0 1 96 from end value Temperature drift lt 0 005 K Rise time fall time lt 50 ms 10 90 Ex approval per conformity PTB 03 ATEX 2023
37. Supply voltage 15 VDC at 20 mA on the transmitter Input current 0 4 20 mA Overcontrol 221mA Undercontrol lt 3 6mA Short circuit 2 24 mA only at Live zero Wire breakage lt 2 mA only with Live zero Resolution 14 bit Linearity error lt 0 05 96 from end value Temperature drift lt 0 005 K Rise time fall time lt 50 ms 10 90 Ex approval PTB 03 ATEX 2217 Marking 9 112 1 G Exib ia ICT4 11 1 D Ex iaD Ex max values field circuits Terminal 1 2 Terminal 3 4 Open circuit voltage Ug lt 191V 6V Short circuit current lo 90mA lt 2 5 mA Max power P 615 mW lt 4mW Characteristic curve trapezoid linear IIC IIB IIC IIB Max external inductance L mH 0 2 1 0 10 20 Max external capacity C nF 170 960 1900 8600 Max internal inductance L 24 2 nF Max internal capacity C negligible General information Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 96 at 55 C per EN 60068 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 D301266 0113 excom 91 excom system components 3 8 2 AIM1Ex analog input module 4 channel Figure 39 Analog input module AI41Ex 92 The analog input module Al41Ex connects 4 wire transducer
38. and resistances 0 30 Q 0 300 Q 0 3 kQ The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus is suitable for use in excom Zone 1 applications The ignition protection class of the inputs is Ex ia IIC Note The channels are galvanically isolated from each other Line compensation and cold junction compensation The line compensation compensates for the line error when the temperature is measured Measurement with temperature resistors can be done if module type TIAOEx R has been configured Line compensation for 3 wire or rather 4 wire measurement is automatic For 2 wire measurement the line resistance has to be determined separately and recorded manually The cold junction compensation increases the measurement accuracy of thermal elements Measurement with thermal elements can be done if module type TI40Ex T has been configured The type of cold junction compensation can be set for all channels with the parameter Cold Junction Note o The first channel of the TIAOEx is activated permanently Therefore this channel should be used when only one sensor is used Configuration and data volume The AI40Ex operates as a true input card with additional status bit for each channel When a status message is pending the status bit of the respective channelis set to 1 in the input word The status bit is set when an error occurs that initiates a diagnostic message D301266 0113 excom Modules for temperature measuring
39. external must be connected to the equipotential bonding with a cable with at least min 6 mm diameter Table 159 Population possibilities 1 x MT24 module rack Designs of the stainless steel Version 1 Drill holes for cable screws inclusive screws enclosures Enclosure with flange plate M16 4 x M20 for voltage supply Ex e II black inclusive screws clamping ability 6 13 mm EG VA 8055 4 x M16 for bus cable Ex e II blue clamping ability 4 9 mm 1 x M20 for climate bolt 108 x M16 for signal cable Ex e Il blue clamping ability 4 9 mm Version 2 Drill holes for cable screws inclusive screws Enclosure with flange plate M20 4 x M20 for voltage supply Ex e II black inclusive screws clamping ability 6 13 mm EG VA 8055 4x M20 for bus cable Ex e II blue clamping ability 6 13 mm 1x M20 for climate bolt 108 x M20 for signal cables Ex e II blue clamping ability 6 13 mm Note The Ex e and Ex i circuits must be layed according to regulations and instructions Please observe the guidelines for cables that cross inside the enclosure 208 D301266 0113 excom Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area Industr A Dimensional drawing to EG VA 8055 Figure 86 EG VA 8055 View into enclosure from the bottom ry e e 209 te e Je p E D
40. or display elements The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus is suitable for use in excom Zone 1 The ignition protection class of the outputs is Ex ia IIC Note The outputs are galvanically isolated from each other One actuator can be connected to each channel Depending on the selection of the connection each channel has two intrinsically safe circuits with different Ex data The behavior of the outputs is parameterized via the PROFIBUS DP master Possible parameters are polarity substitute value strategy wire breakage monitoring and short circuit monitoring Valve control The valuesfor valve triggering can be found inthe load curve The permissible limit values can be found in the Ex certificate of the valve manufacturer Valves that require a higher power than the max power on the output must be controlled via valve control components Suitable control components can be directly connected to the outputs of the DO401Ex module Note Each channel has two different connections These connections have different values in regard to the open circuit voltage and only can be connected individually never together If one connection is used the adjacent connection of the same channel looses its functionality D301266 0113 excom Digital modules Industr A For example the following versions are possible for terminal connection 1 2 Table 40 Voltage and max current with open circuit M
41. zHreuierce EE 139 Modules for temperature measuring ecce ecce ee eee eee eee esee esee eese sees esee esee sees esses sesso sees ose s ose ss ssosssase 140 TIAOEx temperature module 4 channel cssssssssssssecssssssecsessssecsessssessncssscesecssscesesssssesecsuesesecsuesssecsssccssesssecssessnecssessssesseseseeesees 140 Line compensation and cold junction compensation cecssescssseecseeccseeccssccsssecessecessecsnseesssccsssccssscesuscessecsueessnecesseeesneeesees 140 Configuration and data volume etienne tens ntte nett notet ia ai 140 Error message via status bit of the data telegram 141 Measurement range eese nnne tenente ntn nnns 142 Connection figures dte ee ie RD te ea ten 143 zaicuic ia 144 Channel specific module diagnosis ss 147 Function of the LEDS eerte tentes 147 Technical data ett ett ed 148 TI41Ex temperature module 4 channel cessssssssssssesssecssecsessssecsessssessscssscssecssscesecssssenccsussesecsuesssecsssessscessccssessneessessneesseseseessees 149 Configuration and data volume uerit tiet quist settle tbe eE er tice Pe ERU RA ART a 149 Error message via status bit of the data telegram tete tennn tete tnnt tennis tts ttt nettes nnns 150 meos rsee S 151 Acum 152 Channel specific module diagnosis sieisen tette tette tette nett
42. 2 65 29 25 Activation of a software filter to generate an average value Short circuit monitoring on off Short circuit monitoring is activated or deactivated Wire breakage monitoring on off Short circuit monitoring is activated or deactivated Substitue value strategy min value max value last valid value Depending on the parameterization the min value the max value or the last valid value is set The min value is 0 K 273 15 C The max value is 3276 70 K 3003 55 C 144 D301266 0113 excom Modules for temperature measuring Industr A Table 122 cont Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for TI40Ex R Cable resistance Basis 0 Q Setting of cable resistance Line resistance and Basis 0 5 Q basis are subtracted Basis 1 0 Q from linearization for 2 wire connection Basis 1 5 Q Basis 2 0 Q Basis 2 5 Q Basis 3 0 Q Basis 3 5 Q Basis 4 0 Q Basis 4 5 Q Basis 5 0 Q Basis 5 5 Q Basis 6 0 Q Basis 6 5 Q Basis 7 0 Q Basis 7 5 Q Note With 2 wire connection the line resistance scews the result of linearization D301266 0113 excom 145 excom system components TI40Ex T 0 Please take the bit assignment TI40Ex T page 287 Table 123 Parameter for TI40Ex T 146 Parameter name Value Sensor type TypeB Type C Type D Type E Type J TypeK TypeL Type L
43. 4 20 mA off 0 20 mA Dead zero without HART status request Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 0 to the host system off 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system on 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request HART diagnosis active Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system excom sends two different HART error codes to the PLS Error code 30 and error code 31 Error code 30 The HART variables are invalid only information is issued that the HART device status is erroneous Error code 31 The HART variables are invalid the HART communication is erroneous D301266 0113 excom 135 excom system components Table 111 cont Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AOHATEx 1H Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 HART variable primary Selection of the HART variables secondary 1 secondary 2 secondary 3 secondary 4 HART variable of Channel 1 Selection of the channel No belonging to the channel Channel 2 HART variable Channel 3
44. 4 0 K1 SV 1 0 off 1 on 1 K1 SV 2 0 off 1 on 2 K2 SV1 0 off 1 on 3 K2 SV 2 0 off 1 on 4 K3 SV 1 0 off 1 on 5 K3 SV 2 0 off 1 on 6 K4 SV1 0 off 1 on 7 K4 SV 2 0 off 1 on D301266 0113 excom 279 Addendum parameters A 16 AIH41Ex 1H Table 208 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No AIHATEx 1H 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 6s 11 29 2s 2 3 HART status measurement 00 off 0 20 mA range 01 off 4 20 mA 10 on 4 20 mA 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 7 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 Parameters for Channel 1 to Channel 4 00000000 0 1 HART variable of channel 00 Channel 1 01 Channel 2 10 Channel 3 11 Channel 4 2 3 4 HART variable 000 primary 001 Secondary 1 010 Secondary 2 011 Secondary 3 100 Secondary 4 5 6 7 reserved 000 280 D301266 0113 excom AIH41Ex 8H A 17 AIH41Ex 8H Industr A Table 209 Parameter for AIH41Ex 8H Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values No 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 6s 11 2
45. A Average value 00 off 01 4 values 10 8 values 11 16 values 3 0 B Measurement cycle 0 lt 300 ms 0 1 resolution 1 50 ms 196 resolution 1 B De chattering 0 off Control inputs 1 50ms 2 3 B Direction recognition 00 forward f 4 kHz 01 host controlled f 4 kHz 10 Terminal f 4 kHz 11 Terminal auto f gt 1 25 kHz 4 5 B Substitute value output 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 7 B Substitute value input 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 4 0 B1 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 1 B2 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 3 B4 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 2 B3 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 4 5 reserved 00 6 7 B Average value 00 off 01 4 values 10 8 values 11 16 values D301266 0113 excom 291 Addendum parameters A 25 DF20ExP Table 217 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No DF20Ex P 0 0 A1 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 A2 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 2 A3 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 3 A4 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 4 B1 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 5 B2 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 6 B3 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 7 B4 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 0 A Counter 0 host controlled reset 1 Terminal 1 A De chattering 0 off Control inputs 1 50 ms 2 3 A Direction recognition 00 forward f 4 kHz 01 host controlled f 4 kHz 10 Terminal f 4 kHz 11 Te
46. Decimal Hexadecimal table analog output 21 mA 21000 5208 20 mA 20000 4E20 4 mA 4000 OFAO 0 mA 0 0 D301266 0113 excom 133 excom system components Connection figures Figure 49 Terminal assignment AOH40Ex 134 terminal configuration connection possibilities channel 1 9v channel 2 fff EERE TT channel 3 C2 K channel 4 PRE Elle ENKE EENKK EK amp 0 4 20 m amp 0 4 20 mA _ 0 4 20 mA 0 4 20 mA D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Parameters Industr A The module has 4 byte parameters 1 byte per channel AOH40Ex 1H Note Please take the bit assignment AOH40Ex 1H page 283 In this configuration the module also sends a HART variable to the cyclic data communication Table 111 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AOHATEx 1H Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Wire breakage on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Substitue valuestrategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA HART status measurement range off 0 20 mA off 4 20 mA on
47. Ex ia IIIC Ex max value field circuits Ex ia IIC IIB Open circuit voltage U lt 72V Short circuit current 16mA Max power P lt 29 mW Characteristic curve linear Max internal inductance L lt 0 11 mH Max internal capacity C lt 1 1 nF IIC IIB Max external inductance Ly 0 50 mH 2 0 mH Max external capacity C 60 nF 250 nF General information Galvanic isolation to bus and for supply Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 at 55 C per EN 60069 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 130 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Industr A 3 9 3 AOH40Ex analog output module 4 channel Figure 48 Analog output module AOH40Ex The analog output module AOHAOEx is used to connect intrinsically save analog actuators like control valves or process displays The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus is suitable for use in excom Zone 1 applications The ignition protection class of the outputs is Ex ia IIC Note o The channels are not galvanically isolated from each other All outputs have a common mass potential The resolution is 13 bit which means the analog value of 0 21 mA is represented as number between 0 and 8191 For simple handling the host system operates with the value range from
48. SF3 reserved The following parameter exclusively refers to the gateway configuration with the add on C cyclic data or YO control data for the Yokogawa redundancy to the product name Cyclic data The default value of this parameter is 0 and must not be changed Depending on the configuration in the network configurator of the control software the gateway GDP NI can be equipped with an additional function These additional functions are identified by adding C cyclic data or YO control data for Yokogawa redundancy to the product name refer to Configuration of the gateway page 247 C In this configuration the gateway provides an input word and an output word The input data word and the output data word are used as status and control register of the gateway These status descriptions are used to indicate for example which of the two gateways is active and which is passive when the redundancy is switched If a gateway fails this status information can be collected and as a measure the adjacent gateway can be activated with the help of the output data word YO Settings that are needed for the Yokogawa redundancy are being activated More details can be found in the application report excom integration in CentumVP CS3000 D301266 0113 excom 67 excom system components Technical data Table 27 Type code GDP NI Technical d
49. SV1 SV4 on off SV1 4 of Channel 1 4 Channel 3 SV1 SV4 on off Note Avoid activation of more than 4 secondary Channel 4 SV1 SV4 on off variables The module only displays the first 4 activated secondary variables D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules AIH41Ex 8H Industr A o In this configuration the module also sends 8 HART variables to the cyclic data communication Note Please take the bit assignment AIH41Ex 8H page 281 Table 100 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AIH41Ex 8H Cable monitoring on Cable monitoring is activated or deactivated off Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The max value is 21 mA The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 6s 29 25 Channel 1 SV1 SV4 on off Activation deactivation of the secondary variable Channel 2 SV1 SV4 on off SV1 4 of Channel 1 4 Channel 3 SV1 SV4 on off Note Avoid activation of more than 8 secondary Channel 4 SV1 SV4 on off variables The module only displays the first 8 activated secondary variables Depending on the measurement range setting the following substitute values are set when an error occurs Table 101 Measurement range
50. Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage Specific 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent 30 HART status error 31 HART communication error excom sends two different HART error codes to the PLS Error code 30 and error code 31 Error code 30 The HART variables are valid only information is issued that the HART device status is erroneous E Error code 31 The HART variables are invalid the HART communication is erroneous Function of the LEDs Table 116 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for the slot green correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data green blinking fast Module is configured but the master does not send output data Channel off No channel error red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present 138 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Technical data Industr A Table 117 Type code AOH40Ex Technical data AOH40Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 3W Outputs 4 analog actuators Open circuit voltage lt 16VDC Output current 0 4 20 mA per output External working resistance lt 600 Q HART impedance 2240 Short circuit
51. System enclosure EG VA 6555 650 x 550 x 260 mm eeee ette eeteent tentent tton eno ttont enne neto ttt nato to nooo tis 205 Dimensional drawing to EG VA 6555 a tetto E tton tetnsosees 206 System enclosure EG VA 8055 800 x 550 x 260 mm cecssscsssssssseccssecsssecsneecsssecsnscessscessecesaccessecsesccssseecscceseceseessseestecs 208 Dimensional drawing to EG VA 8055 cesssscsssssssssesssssssccsseccsssecssccssnscessecessecensccssseesssecsusecsasccsssecessesnsccsssccesecesscessseceseeseaseesaee 209 Instructions concerning the explosion protection certificates eee e eee e eee eee eere eee eee eene eese seen 211 Information for the evaluation of the U certificates eee tees iesen tee tienne ttnn tonat tto nttt attesa ttt no ttt natis 211 System certification excom system enclosure eee tette tete ttes tts ttt ttts ntis notte notis ttts nnns 212 Information for system approval of the RS 485 IS Ex i layers eee teeeeeeen tena tenn tentes ttes nto na tonat 212 U l examination of the connection of intrinsically safe bus nodes fieldbus participants 213 Evaluation of the external inductance resistance ratio Lp R or rather of the capacities C 214 Shield for the segment coupler SC12EXx eee eee eee eee teen ones esas eee eee en sooo sese esee eee n saos osse eaae seen 217 Shieldi
52. Termination bolt eeeeeeeeenn enn 195 Transport ciento n re ner e an 192 U U Certification asiaa aeania inoia i iaia 211 v Ventilation serranas ann ai ai 257 w Watchdog Timeout secie 227 Z Zone 1 Instr ctions ccc ER RR ah rd ce E Ra 194 Zone 2 zInstructlols cat oto etd e ag E OU GE Re re shared 194 D301266 0113 excom Industrial Automation www turck com Scan the QR code for more information on our products Hans Turck GmbH amp Co KG Witzlebenstrafie 7 45472 M lheim an der Ruhr Germany Tel 49 0 208 4952 0 Fax 49 0 208 4952 264 E Mail more turck com Internet www turck com D301266 2013 01 MIMO
53. The shield must be connected to the enclosure of the PROFIBUS DP connector as a rule inside the connector If you don t want to use the equipotential bonding cable check whether the shield design 2 page 220 meets your requirements Pay attention to General requirements for equipotential bonding page 200 Figure 94 IL hard grounding on both sides RS485 IS a Shield Data line 6 mm equipotential bonding cable hard grounded D301266 0113 excom 219 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area 2 The connection on the feeding device is hard grounded the connections of all segment participants are capacitively grounded Note i This shield design is recommended by TURCK An equalizing cable layed parallel to the the fieldbus is not needed no equalizing currents can flow The shield is also connected to the enclosure of the PROFIBUS DP connector This shield design meets most of the requirements to the most part Pay attention to General requirements for equipotential bonding page 200 Figure 95 Hard grounding on the feeding device capacitive grounding ofall participants RS485 IS a Shield Data line 220 D301266 0113 excom 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 6 6 6 1 6 6 2 6 7 6 7 1 6 7 2 6 7 3 6 7 4 6 7 5 6 7 6 6 7 7 6 7 8 6 7 9 6 7 10 6 10
54. U lt 96V Short circuit current 44 mA Max power P lt 106 mW Characteristic curve linear Max internal inductance L negligible Max internal capacity C negligible Max external inductance capacity IIC IIB a L mH C pF C luF 2 0 0 9 5 1 1 0 1 1 6 1 0 5 1 3 7 3 0 1 1 7 8 6 General information Galvanic isolation to bus and to supply Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 at 55 C per EN 60068 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 D301266 0113 excom 167 excom system components 3 12 Use of the blind module BM1 The blind module BM1 is used for free slots in the module rack in order to comply with protection class IP20 Figure 61 Blind module BM1 168 D301266 0113 excom Module replacement during operation coding pins Industr A 3 13 Module replacement during operation coding pins All modules in operation even while being installed in Zone 1 can be plugged and pulled hot swapping The replacement of defective devices is therefore safe during operation After module replacement an automatic test takes place to ensure that the new module meets the slot specifications Configuration and parameterization of the newly plugged module is also automatic 3 13 1 Mechanical coding The user hasthe opportunity to code the module rack in such a way
55. are very likely Warning Possible personal injuries resulting in death Proceed with special care This symbol is next to warning signs that point to a potential source of danger When not adhered to personal injuries or death are possible Attention Possible damage to device Proceed with care This symbol is next to warning signs that point to a potential source of danger When not adhered to damage to systems hardware and software and installations is possible Note This symbol is next to general instructions that point to important information on how to proceed with the next step of work or the next several steps of work b b Pb The respective information may make the work easier or may help avoid redundant work by proceeding with the incorrect steps D301266 0113 excom General instructions Industr A 1 3 General instructions Attention It is highly recommended that you read this section because safety must not be left to chance when handling electrical devices This operating manual contains the required information for the start up of the TURCK excom system It was specifically designed for qualified personnel with the required technical know how 1 3 1 Intended use Danger The devices described in this operating manual must only be used as intended and as outlined in this operating manual and in the respective technical description and only together with certified OEM devices
56. as a true input card with additional status bit for each channel When a status message is pending the status bit of the respective channel is set to 1 in the input word The status bit is set when an error occurs that initiates a diagnostic message D301266 0113 excom 109 excom system components Depending on the configuration the data volume is different The following configurations are possible Table 78 Input word Output word Type Configuration Configuration of the AIH40Ex 4 AIHAOEx without cyclic HART data 6 AIHAOEx 1H 1 cyclic HART variable 12 AIHAOEx 4H 4 cyclic HART variables 20 AIHAOEx 8H 8 cyclic HART variables Note o The module hardware is identical despite the different configuration The behavior of the module is only influenced by the harware manager via the control or rather via the control system The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the input word e 9 of the first channel Table 79 Bit position of the n th input word of the n th channel Bit assignment of the input word Parameter Bit15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BitO Status MSB SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 20000 equates to 0 to 20 mA Status LSB Bit position of the measurement value 0 20000 equates to 0 to 20 mA SB without Bit position of the measurement value 0
57. assigned Addresses 001 to 125 125 participants can be assigned for MT16 2G Bus addresses 00 000 126 and 127 must not be used Setting of the PROFIBUS DP address is done via rotary switches on the module rack The switches depict the digits of the network address For example the following figure shows the setting of the network address 05 or rather 005 Figure 11 MT16 3G MT24 3G MT16 2G setting of network address A56 05 or rather 005 100th digit n m EN Co 0 56 10th digit 1st digit 10th digit din e Co 0 a5 5 eo 5 ty Qe ty QW m e eim oS 1st digit A Co 96 N 96 coo Assignment of internal module address The modules are slot addressed Thus individual modules do not require adjustments Therefore a module in slot 0 automatically has the internal address 0 a module in slot 1 has the internal address 1 etc Note Slot 0 of module rack MT16 MT24 has a redundant design This slot is exclusive for the gateways Access to the I O addresses Access to the l O periphery is controlled by the configuration of the system Access to respective channels depends on the higher level system 36 D301266 0113 excom Module racks module sub racks of the excom system Industr A 3 2 10 connection to PROFIBUS DP on the module rack To connect the bus two with redundant design 9 pole SUB D female connectors are availabe The assignm
58. called segment couplers TURCK has two different types of segment couplers SC12Ex and OC11Ex The SC12Ex is based on copper wire transmission and has two intrinsically safe RS485 IS lines These can be used for line redundancy for example In comparison the OC11Ex initially converts the non intrinsically safe RS485 signals into optical signals which are led into the Ex area via fiber optic cables On the first excom station a second OC11Ex converts the optical signals into electrical signals From here on the copper cables are cross linked per RS485 IS The signals can be transmitted potential free and interference free across long distances Because of the special characteristics of the RS485 IS Ex i layers the excom must be operated with upstream segment couplers Exception If excom is mounted in a safe area the upstream segment coupler is not needed when the gateway GDP NI is used Next to the task of adjusting the signal transmission to the explosion hazardous area the TURCK segment couplers have a repeater functionality Note e Basically when a DP master is connected to excom because of the used RS485 IS layer a DP Ex i segment coupler TURCK article SC12Ex or a LWL coupler TURCK article OC11Ex must be used For the bus connections in the Ex area a suitable SUB D connector must be used GDP IS D9T RS485IS GDP NI D9T RS485 SC12Ex D9T RS485IS OC11Ex 2G 2 D9T RS4851S OC11Ex 3G 2
59. command the diagnostic block Status H machine is integrated in the diagnostic telegram at this point Table 175 Diagnostic block status H machine 238 Byte No Bit No Byte x Bit 7 6 Bit 5 0 Header Length 00 001000 Byte x 1 Bit 7 Bit 6 0 Status identification status type 1 001 1111 Ox1E Acknowledgment of the switch by DP master Ox1F Redundancy diagnosis Byte x 42 0x00 always 0 Byte x 3 0x00 not relevant Byte x 4 0x00 not relevant Byte x 5 0x00 status of the active gateway Bytex 6 0x00 status of the passive gateway Byte x 7 0x00 identification of the active gateway left right D301266 0113 excom Diagnoses per EN 61158 Industr A 6 7 5 Identification specific diagnosis The bytes 16 to 19 of the diagnostic telegram contain the identification specifice diagnosis One bit per module slot indicates wheter diagnostic messages are present for the respective slot If the respective bit is set a diagnosis for the slot is present Table 176 Byte No Bit No Identification specific diagnosis 16 Bit 7 6 Bit 5 0 Header Length 01 000100 Length 4 byte with use of slot 16 Length 5 byte with use of slot 17 17 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit O Slot 7 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 18 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 11 Slot 10 Sl
60. data Table 33 Technical specifications DM80Ex 74 Type code DM80Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 2W Input circuits per NAMUR EN 60947 5 6 Open circuit voltage 8 VDC Short circuit current 4 mA per input Switching threshold on off typ 1 8 mA 1 4 mA Switching frequency lt 100 Hz Short circuit lt 367 Q Wire breakage lt 0 2 mA Output circuits for intrinsically safe actuators Open circuit voltage 8VDC Nominal current 4 mA Internal resistance 320 Q Switching frequency lt 100 Hz Short circuit lt 3670 Wire breakage lt 0 2 mA Ex approval per conformity PTB 00 ATEX 2178 declaration Marking 112 1 G Ex ib ia IIC T4 11 1 D Ex ia NIC Max values terminal connection 1 2 344 Open circuit voltage U lt 9 6V Short circuit current lt 44 mA Max power P lt 106 mW Characteristic curve linear Max external inductance capacity IIC IIB EC Lo mH Co pF Co pF 2 0 0 9 5 1 1 0 1 1 6 1 0 5 1 3 7 3 0 2 1 7 8 6 Max internal inductance capacity negligible L C Displays Operating readiness 1 x green red Status error 8 x yellow red General information Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity lt 93 at 55 C per IEC 60069
61. data and only sends the currently valid input values Thus the masters always have the current status of the inputs The gateway or the master can initiate the switch to system redundancy When switching occurs the function that allows sending of output data to the output modules is transferred from one gateway to the other one Initiation of a switch by the gateway is automatic An automatic switch by the gateway is executed when communication on the primary line Watchdog Timeout is lost or when the primary gateway is pulled In addition the masters can force a switch This type of switch is done via the cyclic data of the gateway The gateway status can be displayed via the cyclic data of the gateway a new status can be set via the master A gateway with C added to the name must be configured GDP C with GSD file T FF9F Note When replacing a defective gateway please note that the new device must have the same firmware and hardware revisions as the redundant gateway Figure 100 System redundancy Host Redundancy connection Host P reserve Master Master PROFIBUS DP RS485 SC12Ex PROFIBUS DP RS485 IS D301266 0113 excom 227 excom Start up 6 4 Line redundancy The description for designing a line redundancy can be found i
62. has a redundant design This slot is exclusive for the gateways 6 2 2 Access to the l O addresses Access to the I O periphery is controlled by the configuration of the system Access to respective channels depends on the higher level system D301266 0113 excom 223 excom Start up 6 2 3 Connection of PROFIBUS DP Depending on module rack there are one or two with redundant design 9 pole SUB D female connectors for the bus connection The assignment meets the PROFIBUS DP standard Figure 97 54321 12345 View of a SUB D p female connector eo54vee and a SUB D male e e oeo connector lt x 9876 6789 Table 160 Pole RS485 RS485 IS Meaning Assignment of No the SUB D pole 1 n C n C 2 n C n C 3 RxD TxD P RxD TxD P Received data send data for B cable red 4 n C n C 5 DGND ISGND Bus termination GND 6 DP ISP Bus termination VP 7 n C n C 8 RxD TxD N RxD TxD N Received data send data for A cable green 9 n C n C 224 excom can be connected to every system with a PROFIBUS DP connection master functionality One of the requirements of process automation is that electrical equipment is serviced and replaced if need be while in operation In order to meet these requirements the PROFIBUS DP interface for excom has an intrinsically safe design Between PROFIBUS DP master and excom a conversion from RS485 to intrinsically safe R 485 IS must take pl
63. is 20 ms activated 50 ms Channel 1 8 active Activation or rather deactivation of Channel 1 8 deactive If a channel is not used it can be switched off D301266 0113 excom Digital modules Channel specific module diagnosis Industr A The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the DM80Ex module supports the following channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 Table 31 Error code No Meaning Error codes Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage Specific 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent Function of the LEDs Table 32 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply blinking red Module is not configured for the slot green Correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data green blinking fast Module is configured but the master does not send output data Channel off Channel not active not set yellow Channel switched active red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present D301266 0113 excom 73 excom system components Technical
64. last valid value Polarity normal Activation or deactivation of the signal inversion inverted Channel specific modulediagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the D0401Ex module supports the following channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 Table 46 Error code No Meaning Error codes Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage Specific 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent D301266 0113 excom 83 excom system components Function of the LEDs Table 47 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for the slot green Correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data green blinking fast Module is configured but the master does not send output data Channel off Channel not active not set yellow Channel switched active red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present 84 D301266 0113 excom Digital modules Technical data Industr A Table 48 Type code DO401Ex Technical d
65. module 4 channel Configuration and data volume Connection figure E I EE E A A A A I EE ARE T A A ATA Channel specific module DIAGNOSIS sesssssesecsssescessseecssssccesssseessssceessscsssssseessesessnssecsssnecssusessuecessuesessnsseessueceesnneeeesneceesneeees FUNCTION Of the LEDS Techical hated c Analog HART compatible modules AIHAOEx analog input module 4 channel ee esee trente tte nt tena tontos tesis ttsat tto t itta ttt sa ttt ns tt sati s 109 Configuration and data volume ssssccssssscssssccsseeecssesecssseccessseecsseeecssssscessseeesseeecssssecesseecessseceesunessnsecsnseecessnecsnssecesnsecenaeeses 109 Error message via the status bit of the data telegram eese trennen tette ttnnn tenen inttencteen 110 Floating point format of the HART variable 0 sssscssssscessssccssseecssseecessseecsnsecessseccsnscecsnsseccsnseesssecesssecsnssecenseecesnseesenseeees 111 Mapping of the input data MM 111 Measurement range Connection figures Parameters sisses i ubstitue value strategy Channel specific module diagnosis ssss ssssssssssssssessesssseeeesssseoessssstossessstesnssustossessteosusssteonsssteesussstssteesusssteesssssteesessstesssssteeessssstet Function Of the dz pP
66. monitoring off deactivated with the help of channels In case of a wire breakage the respective channel LED is red Substitue valuestrategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The max value is 21 mA The min value depends on the chosen range for 0 20 mA the min value is 0 and for 4 20 mA itis 3 6 mA Connection active This parameter is used to set the type of transducer passive supply The parameter must be active when the transducer is fed via the input terminal of the excom station The parameter must be passive when the transducer is fed externally Measurement range 0 20 mA Depending on parameterization the measurement 4 20 mA range is set to 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA 0 20 mA Diagnosis for failure to reach the measurement range is not possible 4 20 mA Diagnosis of measurement range undershoot and overshoot per NAMUR standard Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 Depending on the measurement range the following substitute values are set when a error occurs Table 52 Measurement range Substitute values Substitute values for AI401Ex Oto 20mA min value 0 mA max value 21 mA 4to 20mA min value 3 6 mA max value 21 mA D301266 0113 excom 89 excom system components Channel specific module diagnosis The diagnostic data are struc
67. mono IQT Dimensional drawing of the module rack MT16 3G Figure 6 MT16 3G 260 235 D301266 0113 excom 31 excom system components 3 2 5 Module rack MT24 3G The following figure shows the module rack MT24G 3G that is equipped with MINI COMBICON clamps for the signal connection layer Figure 7 Module rack MT24 3G go 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Er EN C Two slots for 24 VDC power supply modules Ex e connection for the external power
68. normal 1 inverted 4 5 B Measurement range 00 0 100 Hz 01 0 1 kHz 10 0 4 kHz 6 B Release 0 host controlled 1 Terminal 7 B Edge count 0 ascending 1 ascending descending D301266 0113 excom B t5Ie WoIET I M 18 e Certification EC type examination certification ssssss 211 LU ITE 211 Condensation ert enei 53 257 Configuration MC 247 Connection icr M 195 PROFIBUS DP inariana epar ria xn nit erkannt d 37 224 Connection figures SAIAQU EX 88 Lider 94 muro UIT 100 AIHAOEX AIHATMEX 112 123 xc e 105 SAOH4 OBEN 134 SIDEZOEXK sis ciesncinsctaeisseanisievanneian in a 156 SIDIAQEX saesae a EE aN 76 bod MNT 71 SIDO4O VEN M E 82 Ol D mE 143 151 CYCLE tie E 249 D Diagnosis Lun 90 96 cci qe 102 AIHAOEX AIHATEX 117 128 eru e 107 entis dg Em 138 D ius qr 166 SIDIAQEX ai UTERE 77 Do que 73 iori 83 ILUlqm 147 153 Dimensional drawings SEG VA 4055 N 206 209 SEGVA 6555 cisco ERR REOR OP EDEN REL ER dod 203 E EC conformity declaration seeeeee 193 Emergency Off eU
69. observed The components are to be used in fieldbus systems per PROFIBUS guideline 2 262 PROFIBUS RS485 IS User and Installation Guideline Version 1 1 June 2003 The max values described herein have been determined by the PNO in agreement with the PTB PTB detemined the limit values with the help of ignition test experiments also refer to atp publication 10 2001 and verified the values determined in the experiments with the calculation model ispark refer to PTM news 113 2003 issue 2 A classical evaluation for proving intrinsic safety is really difficult Each participant of the bus system can be an input or an output For this reason an intrinsically safe RS485 fieldbus system was defined for approval Here all participants have the same prerequisites which are listed in the certificatie PTB 09 ATEX 2013 to the GDP IS Max value of each terminal pair U 4 2 V Max value of the sum of the terminal pairs 4 8 A 212 D301266 0113 excom Instructions concerning the explosion protection certificates Industr A Figure 91 fieldbus participants Intrinsically safe RS485 IS fieldbus system intrinsically sate RS485 IS fieldbus system Ui 474 Tie 448 amp U l examination of the connection of intrinsically safe bus nodes fieldbus participants E All participants are parallel connected to the bus Thus the individual output voltage U on the bus participants can not be added together At no tim
70. off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameters for Channel 3 and Channel 4 bit assignment analog Channel 1 2 Parameters for Channel 5 and Channel 6 bit assignment analog Channel 1 3 Parameters for Channel 7 and Channel 8 bit assignment analog Channel 1 4 0 Channel 2 O active 1 inactive 1 Channel 4 O active 1 inactive 7 Channel 8 O active 1 inactive 266 D301266 0113 excom DM80Ex 8l DM8OEx S 8l Industr A A 3 DMSOEx 81I DMS8OEx S 8l Table 195 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No DMB80Ex 81 DMB80Ex S 8l 0 Parameters for Channel 1 and Channel 2 2 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 3 reserved 0 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage 0 on monitoring 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameters for Channel 3 and Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 and Channel 2 2 Parameters for Channel 5 and Channel 6 bit assignment to Channel 1 and Channel 2 3 Parameters for Channel 7 and Channel 8 bit assignment to Channel 1 and Channel 2 4 0 Channel 2 O active 1 inactive 1 Channel 4 O active 1 inactive 7 Channel 8 O active 1 inactive D301266 0113 excom 267 Addendum parameters A 4 DI40Ex Table 196 Byte BitNo Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No DI40Ex
71. rather via the control system The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the input word e g of the first channel Table 93 Bit position of the n th input word of the n th channel Bit assignment of the input word Parameter Bit15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BitO Status MSB SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 20000 equates to 0 to 20 mA Status LSB Bit position of the measurement value 0 20000 equates to 0 to 20 mA SB without Bit position of the measurement value 0 20000 equates to 0 to 20 mA status SB Status Bit settable via the gateway parameters n 1 2 3 014 Error message via the status bit of the data telegram oz The module sends depending on the parameterized measurement range 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA an error message via the status bis of the data telegram when an error occurs D301266 0113 excom 121 excom system components Floating point format of the HART variable The HART variable are displayed as follows Table 94 Floating point format Byte Meaning n Prefix Exponent 28 27 26 2 2 2 2 2 n 1 Exponent Mantissa 2 24 a 2 25 2 2 ae n 2 Mantissa 28 2 270 27 212 2713 214 2 15 n 3 Mantissa 2716 2V 218 27 2 20 2 2 2 23 The input data of the module and the HART variables are mapped as follows This case here involves a modul
72. the slave writes the address 255 into this byte Table 173 Name Meaning Bytes 5 and 6 Ident Ident Number This word contains the PROFIBUS Ident No assigned to Number unsigned16 this device This ident No can be used to test and to accurately identify the slave 236 D301266 0113 excom Diagnoses per EN 61158 Industr A 6 7 3 Status diagnosis The bytes 7 to 15 in the diagnostic telegram contain the status diagnosis of the device With two bits per slot module the module status is displayed here Table 174 Byte Bit No Status diagnosis No 7 Bit 7 6 Bit 5 0 Header Length 00 001001 Length 9 byte with use of slot 16 Length 11 byte with use of slot 17 8 Bit 7 0 Header 0x82 9 Bit 7 0 Header module status 0x00 10 Bit 7 2 Bit 1 0 reserved 0000 00 1 11 Bit 7 6 Bit 5 4 Bit 3 2 Bit 1 0 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 GDP 2 8 d 8 12 Slot 7 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 4 13 Slot 11 Slot 10 Slot 9 Slot 8 14 Slot 15 Slot 14 Slot 13 Slot 12 15 Bit 7 6 Bit 5 4 Bit 3 2 Bit 1 0 unused unused unused Slot 16 00 00 00 B A 00 without differentiation 01 status active 10 status inactive 11 reserved B 00 valid 01 invalid module errror 10 invalid wrong module 11 invalid module missing D301266 0113 excom 237 excom Start up 6 7 4 Structure status H machine If a H machine is recognized via the parameter
73. the values for the external RS485 IS fieldbus system and comparing them to the real cable configurations Summary When the intrinsically safe PROFIBUS system is used with the exclusive use of approved TURCK components of the remote l O system excom the Ex relevant max values are not exceeded up to a participant number of 31 excom stations With the use of standard PROFIBUS cables cable types A or rather B a safety technical limitation of the cable length is not required Note o The preceding proof that was done as an example must be transferred from the operator of the installation to the real existing installations The operator of the installation is solely responsible for proof of intrinsic safety D301266 0113 excom Shield for the segment coupler SC 12Ex Industr A 5 6 Shield for the segment coupler SC12Ex In order to avoid irradiation of the data transmission by variable disturbances the PROFIBUS DP cable must be layed and connected in regard to the shield according to the requirements Here take into consideration that electrical fields are effectively suppressed by one sided grounded shielding The more frequently occurring magnetic fields are often suppressed only by two sided grounded shielding With two sided grounded shielding no equalizing currents must flow across the shield because of potential differences from one connection point to another Here possible capacitive grounding may pr
74. transducer with external supply The connection diagram shows the analog input in active operation this means the connected 2 wire transducer is fed via the signal cable At parameterization the parameter Connection page 270 must receive the value active The analog input is displayed in the passive operation this means the connected 4 wire transducer is fed via the external voltage source At parameterization the parameter Connection page 270 must receive the value passive The analog input is active or passive channel 1 Figure 38 inal terminal configuration connection active passive ermina alternatively assignment i 11 AI401Ex I IEA 14 channel 2 V i J 7 ao oo NM PT N NM BK Of N channel 3 JV Co C2 Kilo ae A ho channel 4 AR wo t T AB 88 D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Parameters Industr A Note o Please take the bit assignment Al401Ex page 270 Table 51 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AI401Ex Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or deactivated monitoring off with the help of channels In case of a short circuit the respective channel LED is red Wire breakage on Wire breakage monitoring is activated or
75. 0 21000 This raw value is reduced by the AOH40Ex to 13 bit resolution HART compatibility HART compatible actuators can be connected to the module The actuators communicate directly with the HART controller that is integrated in the module Up to 8 HART variables max 4 per channel can be read via the cyclic user data communication of the PROFIBUS DP The bidirectional variable exchange between host system and HART transmitter is handled via PROFIBUS DPV1 services Configuration and data volume Depending on the configuration the data volume is different The following configurations are possible Table 106 Input word Output word Type Configuration Configuration of the AOH40Ex 0 4 AOHAOEx without cyclic HART data 2 4 AOHAOEx 1H 1 cyclic HART variable 8 4 AOHAOEx 4H 4 cyclic HART variables 16 4 AOHAOEx 8H 8 cyclic HART variables D301266 0113 excom 131 excom system components Note i The module hardware is identical despite the different configuration The behavior of the module is only influenced by the harware manager via the control or rather via the control system The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the output word e g of the first channel Table 107 Bit position of the output word of the n th channel Bitassignment of the output word Bit15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit O Bit
76. 0 Parameter for Channel 1 2 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 3 reserved 0 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage 0 on monitoring 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 0 Channel 1 0 active 1 inactive 1 Channel 2 0 active 1 inactive 7 Channel 4 0 active 1 inactive 268 D301266 0113 excom DO401Ex Industr A A 5 DO401Ex Table 197 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameters for No DO401 0 Parameter for Channel 1 2 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 3 reserved 0 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage 0 on monitoring 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 reserved 00000000 D301266 0113 excom 269 Addendum parameters A 6 Al401Ex Table 198 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameters for No AI401 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2
77. 0 mA Max value 21mA 4 to 20 mA Min value 3 6 mA Max value 21 mA 116 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Channel specific module diagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Industr A Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the AIH40Ex devices support the following channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 Table 88 Error code No Meaning Error codes Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage 7 Upper limit value exceeded 8 Lower limit value has not been reached Specific 16 Cable error 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent 30 HART status error 31 HART communication error excom sends two different HART error codes to the PLS Error code 30 and error code 31 E Error code 30 The HART variables are valid only information is issued that the HART device status is erroneous Error code 31 The HART variables are invalid the HART communication is erroneous Table 89 AIH40Ex Error codes AIHAOEx Measurement value Error code Message text 0OmA I 2mA 6 Wire breakage 2mA I 3 6 8 Lower limit value has not been reached 3 6mA 1 21 mA Acceptable range 21 mA lt I l
78. 00 96 D301266 0113 excom 101 excom system components Channel specific module diagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the Al43Ex module supports channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 The channel specific status messages depend on the parameterization of the module With the parameter Cable monitoring page 271 the respective diagnostic message can be suppressed Table 67 Error code No Meaning Module diagnosis Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage Specific 16 Cable error 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent Function of the LEDs Table 68 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for the slot green Correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data Channel off No channel error red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present 102 D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Technical data Industr A Table 69 Type code Al43Ex Technical data Al43Ex Supply voltage via the module rac
79. 00 96 is recalculated as number in Bit 15 with 0 1 Digit and sent to the host system Depending on the selection of the gateway parameters Analog data format page 265 the status bit is integrated into the process data left aligned right aligned or it is not integrated at all D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Industr A Table 63 Input byte Output byte Type Configuration Configuration of the Al43Ex 8 Al43Ex Input module with status The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the input word e g of the first channel Table 64 Bit position of the input word of the n th channel Bit assignment of the input word Parameter Bit15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BitO Status MSB SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 10000 equates to 0 to 100 96 Status LSB Bit position of the measurement value 0 10000 equates to 0 to 100 96 SB without Bit position of the measurement value 0 10000 equates to 0 to 100 96 status SB Status Bit settable via the gateway parameters n 1 2 3or4 D301266 0113 excom 99 excom system components Connection figures When 3 wire potentiometers are used a bridge must be set on the connection terminals on the module rack Resistance measurements the evaluation of potentiometers with2 wire connection are not possible The mod
80. 1 excom system components Note All secondary variables that were activated at parameterization are assigned to a slot in the mapped input data also when no HART compatible device is connected to the respective channels Measurement range Table 82 Measurement value Transmitted value Measurement a valustahle Decimal Hexadecimal analog input 21mA 21000 5208 20mA 20000 4E20 4 mA 4000 OFAO OmA 0 0 Connection figures Figure 45 Terminal assignment AIH40Ex terminal configuration connection channel 1 N N N l N wo channel 2 _ 9 Co N channel 3 Co Co i 4 channel 4 Li eb fede Eere EERE u 112 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Industr A Parameters Note o Please take the bit assignment AIHAOEx page 274 Table 83 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AIH40Ex Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Wire breakage on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA HART status off 0 20 mA off 0 20 mA
81. 11 Type K 0100 Type L 0101 Type N 0110 Type R 0111 Type S 1000 Type T 1001 Type U 1010 Type C 1011 Type D 1101 75 75 mV 5 uV 1111 1 2 1 2 V 100 uV 4 5 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1 s 10 2 6 s 11 29 2 s 6 7 Reference point 00 none 01 internal 10 Pt100 on terminal 11 external fixed 288 D301266 0113 excom TI41Ex A 23 TI41Ex Industr A Table 215 Byte Parameter for No TI41Ex Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for Channel 1 0to3 4 5 Cable resistance Substitute value strategy 0000 basis 0 Q 0001 basis 0 5 Q 0010 basis 1 0 Q 0011 basis 1 5 Q 0100 basis 2 0 Q 0101 basis 2 5 Q 0110 basis 3 0 Q 0111 basis 3 5 Q 1000 basis 4 0Q 1001 basis 4 50 1010 basis 5 0Q 1011 basis 5 5Q 1100 basis 6 0Q 1101 basis 6 5Q 1110 basis 7 0Q 1111 basis 7 5 Q 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value Wire breakage monitoring O on 1 off Short circuit monitoring O on 1 off Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 Parameters for all channels 0to3 Sensor type 0000 Pt100 IEC 751 0100 Pt100 JIS 0110 Pt100 SAM 1000 Ni100 1011 Cu100 4 5 Filter PT1 00 off
82. 1372 TypeL 73 200 1173 900 Type L GOST 73 200 1073 800 Type N 3 270 1573 1300 Type R 223 50 2042 1769 Type S 223 50 2042 1769 Type T 3 270 673 400 Type U 73 200 873 600 142 D301266 0113 excom Modules for temperature measuring Industr A Connection figures Figure 51 Terminal terminal configuration connection possibilities Selectable assignment 11 TI40Ex channel 1 13 RTH 4L 14 J GEE channel 2 RTH 3L XEXE XN 9v OM Oe ee Ajoj N RTH 2L channel 3 I IET ic PT100 VG ele Ekki channel 4 B T KEEN T n oO D301266 0113 excom 143 excom system components Parameters TI40Ex R Note o Please take the bit assignment TI40Ex R page 285 Table 122 Parameter for TIAOEx R Parameter name Value Sensor type Pt100 IEC Pt200 IEC Pt500 IEC Pt1000 IEC Pt100 JIS Pt1000 JIS Pt100 SAMA Pt1000 SAMA Ni100 Pt100 GOST reserved CU100 reserved 0 30 O mQ 0 300 Q 10 mQ 0 3 kQ 100 mQ Setting of sensor type Connection 2 wire 0 Q Basis 2 wire 8 Q Basis 3 wire 4 wire Connection technology 2 wire 3 wire etc Filter PT1 off 0 1s
83. 2 3 11 3 11 1 3 11 2 3 11 3 3 11 4 3 11 5 3 11 6 3 12 3 13 3 13 1 26 Channel specific module diagnosis eterne teen tte nnt ttts nnn tts tonto tttt nont tts nott nonnisi ttt notis nonis 138 F nction of the LEDS esce re cider diede ee des edo deeds ect de beendet eg cese deside 138 3 Fechricaldat ote eerte eee elus cete ees Dt get dede pes e Rue Tete deesse dese rade 139 Modules for temperature measuring ecce ecce ee eee ee eee eese esses esee eese eee ees se ese see esee esses osse osse bosse sssase 140 TIAOEx temperature module 4 channel ccscsscsssssssecssecssecssssssessessssecsscssscesecssssesesssscesecsuesesecsuesssecsssessscsssccssessneessessnecsseseseeesees 140 Line compensation and cold junction compensation ou ecssescsssecsesecsseccssccssseceseecessecsnsccsssccsnsccssscesscessecsseessuecesneesneeesees 140 Configuration and data volume eee 140 Error message via status bit of the data telegram 141 Measurement range eese enn tnnt te onte ntn 142 Connection figUfes ttem cte pte ce ten 143 Parameters sse 144 Channel specific module diagnosis 147 Function of the LEDS 147 Technical data s bett A IR bt t RED E e D HU IU d He ee ted 148 TI41Ex temperature module 4 channel cesssessssssssesssscssessessssecsesssscssncssscssecssscesecssssesccsussese
84. 2 bus cables PROFIBUS cables are Cable rigid R 110 O km L 0 78 mH km C 30 nF km L uH resulting in RC 7095 Cable flexible R 100 O km L 0 9 mH km C 28 5 nF km Lc pH resulting in RE 90 t Comparison of the external indunctance resistance ratio Ly R to the characteristic data of the used PROFIBUS cable Lo uH Lc uH 2 9472 gt 9 0 e g pn gt a a D301266 0113 excom Instructions concerning the explosion protection certificates Industr A For voltages lt 10 V the permissible capacity in the current circuit C 3 uF for the group IIC The max defined length of a PROFIBUS segment cannot exceed 1200 m For this reason the evaluation of the permissible capacity is to be seen as not critical Alternative evaluation When cable types A or rather B per EN 60079 25 are used according to the specifications in the EC type examination certificate PTB 09 ATEX 2013 the following cable configurations must be assumed also refer to excerpt from the atp publication m L R ratio LR x 15 uH O Capacity configuration C lt 250 nF km Now the approach described in EN60079 25 is used 9 3 electrical characteristic values of cables The electrical characteristic values Cc and Lc or C and L Rj must be determined for all cables used in an intrinsically safe system according to a b or c a the most unfavorable electrical characteristic values that are indicated by the manu
85. 264 D301266 0113 excom GDP Industr A A 1 GDP Table 193 Byte BitNo Parameter name Parameter values Parameters for No GDP 0 0 1 Prm Mode 01 Mode Parametrization mode predefined as constant parameter by the GSD file 2 Power frequency 0 50 Hz 1 60 Hz 3 4 Analog data format 00 Status MSB 01 Status LSB 10 No status 11 PNO profile 5 6 Module rack 00 not used 01 MT8 8 I O module 10 MT16 16 1 O module 11 MT24 24 l O module 7 SF1 0 Selection 0 1 Selection 1 1 0 1 Redundancy mode 00 off 01 Line redundancy 11 System redundancy 2 SF 3 0 Selection 0 1 Selection 1 3 Power supply unit 0 simple 1 redundant 4 5 reserved 00 6 7 SF2 00 Selection 0 01 Selection 1 10 Selection 2 11 Selection 3 2 0to6 Address Offset Value Oto 124 7 Address Offset O off 1 on 3 0 to 5 HCIR WCBC basis x 100 Oto 63 5 ms 6 HCIR WCBC factor 0 Basis x 1 1 Basis x 16 7 HCIR active O off 1 on D301266 0113 excom 265 Addendum parameters A 2 DM80Ex DMS80EX S Table 194 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No DMSO0Ex DMSOEx S 0 Parameters for Channel 1 and Channel 2 2 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 3 Effective direction 0 Input 1 Output 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage 0 on monitoring 1
86. 301266 0113 excom AOH40Ex 1H Industr A A 19 AOH40Ex 1H Table 211 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No AOH40Ex 1H 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 reserved 00 2 3 HART status measurement 00 off 0 20 mA range 01 of f 4 20 mA 10 on 4 20 mA 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring 0 on 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 Parameters for Channel 1 to Channel 4 00000000 0 1 HART variable of channel 00 Channel 1 01 Channel 2 10 Channel 3 11 Channel 4 2 3 4 HART variable 000 primary 001 Secondary 1 010 Secondary 2 011 Secondary 3 100 Secondary 4 5 6 7 reserved 000 D301266 0113 excom 283 Addendum parameters A 20 AOH40Ex 8H Table 212 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No AOHAOEx 8H 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 reserved 00 2 K1 SV 3 0 off 1 on 3 K1 SV 4 0 off 1 on 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring 0 on 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit
87. 350 5 S9 T e p ite B 20 i ud 80 AH E Za D301266 0113 excom 203 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area Figure 80 EG VA 4655 Sideview with door Flange plate for the EG VA 4655 Figure 81 M20 flange plate 352 for EG VA 4655 66 iion 434 m B D m 9990000000006 HE e P PET EE CE 209 PEAR QOOOOOS o00000 160 qp 1o090000000000Q0 7 5000000000000 4 4 96660606600000 THT 1 133 3 L i333 L 133 3 204 D301266 0113 excom Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area Industr A System enclosure EG VA 6555 650 x 550 x 260 mm Ex e Il stainless steel enclosure with hinge jointed door and window visible range 530 x 80 mm for housing the excom module carrier Special characteristics E Base body with bent drip rail 4 welded on outer plates 2 profile rails C profile on rubber stops to stabilize the module racks 2 CU rails nickel plated as shield rails for applying the cable shields M6 grounding bolts internally welded on M8 grounding bolts externally welded on The flange plate and the front door are delivered with the base body Note o The M8 grounding bolt external must be connected to the equipotential bonding with a cable with at least min 6 mm diameter Table 158 Population possibilit
88. 6 0113 excom 19 Introduction of the excom system 2 2 Overview of the excom components Note e The order information for all components of a excom system can be found in the catalog Remote l O excom D300395 Table 1 Module rack for Module rack for Converter Componentsof Zone1 Zone2 sub rack the excom system MT16 2G MT16 3G MT24 3G MT PPS Module rack DC supply 24 VDC DC supply 24 VDC DC supply 24 VDC AC supply max 2 power supply max 2 power supply max 2 power supply 230 115 VAC devices modules modules max 2 AC DC converters max 2 gateways max 2 gateways max 2 gateways 16 I O modules 16 I O modules 24 I O modules max max max 128 binary I Os max 128 binary I Os max 192 binary I Os max or 64 analog I Os or 64 analog I Os or 96 analog I Os max ora max ora max ora combination thereof combination thereof combination thereof 20 D301266 0113 excom Overview of the excom components Industr A Table 2 1 O modules Components of the excom DM80Ex 8 channel binary I O module to connect NAMUR sensors and small system performance actuators I O modules DI40Ex 4 channel binary input module to connect NAMUR sensors galvanically isolated DO401Ex 4 channel binary output module to connect Ex i magnet valves or indicators lt 0 75 W galvanically isolated AI401Ex 4 channel binary input module to con
89. 6 10 1 6 10 2 6 11 6 11 1 6 11 2 6 12 Industr A excom Start up Characteristics of the PROFIBUS DP Setting of PROFIBUS DP address sseccececccccccoccoecccccccccocccccecccccccococccecccccccoccoccccccccccoccocccecccssseccccceeeese Assignment of internal module address Access to the l O addresses Connection of PROFIBUS DP Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP Gateway redundancy eene Line redundancy hardware sss Systemredundancy hardware eee eese terere nnne nte notte nnn tts ttt notte noit ttt nois ttt notti notte notti nios nonis EBXE I 228 Parametrization of excom with line redundancy e ettet entrent notte notti ttt ttts notis notet notte 228 Redundancy mode off Redundancy mode Line Redundancy sssscsssssecssssecsssscecssscecsnseecsnssscssssecesssecsnssecesssccessssessnscesssssscessnseessnssseesnseecesseeessnseesense 229 System redundancy 230 Parametrization of excom with system redundancy eese tete tte nnt tient notte noto tts notio nonno nostis 230 Redundancy modus System RECUACAN CY ssssssccseesecssesscessssecssseecesssseesnscecsnseseesnseecssssscessseecsnseecesssecsusscesnseecunsseecsnseseesneeesense 230 Redundancy monitoring AX X 231 Input word for the current status of the gateways csssc
90. 6 s 11 2925 2 Measurement range 0 0 20 mA 1 4 20 mA 3 Connection O active 1 passive 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring 0 on 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 reserved 00000000 270 D301266 0113 excom AI41Ex Industr A A 7 Al41Ex Table 199 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No AI41Ex 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 6s 11 29 2 s 2 3 Measurement range 00 0 10V 01 2 10V 10 0 20 mA 11 4 20 mA 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 7 Cable monitoring 00 o0n 11 0ff 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 reserved 00000000 D301266 0113 excom 271 Addendum parameters A 8 AI43Ex Table 200 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No Al43Ex 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 6s 11 292s 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 ma
91. 60 DF20Ex P COUNTER module 2 a EAE E AEA AA N 161 SCOUMTSM IA oE DUE 161 Input to determin count direction u ecsssssssessessseessecsscsssesssesssecsscssscsssesssssssecsssssecsecsssessessssccescesseessecssecscasseeseecneeeseeseerses 161 EX cuter2g Uu 161 Dynamic eval atiOri sive eiecit teo ettet eicere tice pie petet desp vecta UL boe abet rect a rage sete aes 162 Furiction ef the LEDs es nter tercer tetuer etel ret ees despues eene cdestvegebavscetuvessdbdnscensesslewecbersvess 163 zidcuiicE e M 164 Substitute values and validity of measurement values for DF2OEx eterne trennt ttentttennittesenntis 165 Channel specific module diagnosis i Te hinicalidataz Ee ET R O NA OA AE Use of the blind module BM esccesecoccccsosccoceoccoccceccocccosecosocscocccosecccosccosccososssoscocsecosesscescosseosoesseossss 168 Module replacement during operation coding pins Mec hiatal COC IN G um aves cracitesecs Seca bates asec aE RTL R Hace A A AA E E a D301266 0113 excom Overview of system architecture Industr A 3 1 Overview of system architecture To accommodate all components the system consists of power supply units or power supply modules gateways l O modules as well as module racks The module rack has an integrated backplane The backplane distributes energy and transfers data and contains the connection layer for the field devices
92. 9 2s 2 K1 SV3 O off 1 on 3 K1 SV4 O off 1 on 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 7 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 0 K1 SV 1 0 off 1 on 1 K1 SV 2 0 off 1 on 2 K2 SV1 0 off 1 on 3 K2 SV 2 0 off 1 on 4 K3 SV 1 0 off 1 on 5 K3 SV 2 0 off 1 on 6 K4 SV1 0 off 1 on 7 K4 SV 2 0 off 1 on D301266 0113 excom 281 Addendum parameters A 18 AOH40Ex 4H Table 210 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No AOHAOEx 4H 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 reserved 0 1 HART status 0 off 1 on 2 K1 SV 3 O off 1 on 3 K1 SV 4 O off 1 on 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring O on 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring O on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 0 K1 SV 1 0 off 1 on 1 K1 SV 2 0 off 1 on 2 K2 SV1 0 off 1 on 3 K2 SV 2 0 off 1 on 4 K3 SV 1 0 off 1 on 5 K3 SV 2 0 off 1 on 6 K4 SV1 0 off 1 on 7 K4 SV 2 0 off 1 on 282 D
93. A est EL NM MEM 15 Information for project planning installation of the product testes tentent tton tttnnttsnttt acis 15 D301266 0113 excom 13 General information 1 1 1 2 14 Documentation concept This operating manual contains the required information for the intended use and start up of the excom products It was specifically developed for qualified personnel with the required technical know how The second chapter contains an introduction of the remote l O system excom Here an overview is given about variations and performance characteristics of a excom system The third chapter contains a description of the details of the available excom modules gateways module racks and system enclosures The fourth chapter contains all basic information about the bus components of the excom system in PROFIBUS DP In the fifth chapter you will find all significant information about mounting and installation of the excom station in the Ex area The sixth chapter describes the start up of excom in PROFIBUS DP Chapter seven contains information about maintenance and troubleshooting The eighth chapter contains a list of available excom accessories Explanations of the symbols that were used Danger Probable injuries to persons resulting in death Proceed with extra special care This symbol is next to warning signs that point to a potential source of danger When not adhered to personal injuries or death
94. C C PTB 05 ATEX 2053 X 3 136 Ex n U T4 Tu 20 70 C H TURCK D 45466 Mulhern an der Rutw P amp L Figure 72 OC11Ex 2G 2 Frontal view OC11EWw2G 2 C Pee en TURCK D 45406 Mdlieim an dar une Le Ml Nicht unter Spannung ffnen L go not open when energized Ne pas ouvrir ce ON 0 D Connection PROFIBUS DP standard interface Fiber optic cable connection Shield connection capacitive or direct grounding 3 pole plug adapters to connect the supply voltage Grounding bolt with M5 thread Rotary switch to select a baud rate or the mode Baud Rate Recognition Communication interface Marking of the device rCATMMONBS D301266 0113 excom 183 excom bus c 4 3 2 System design with OC11Ex omponents Fig ure 73 Non Ex area Fiber optic cable for signal transmission DP V1 RS485 Master Ex area zone 2 Q e OC11Ex 3G 9 e Ex area zone 1 max distance between the fibre optic connection fibre optic couplers 2 5 km 1 e 6 OC11Ex 2G RS485 IS DP connector lt DP connector with integrated Slave excom Slave terminating resistor 4 3 3 Male connector and bus termination on the OC11Ex 184 For R 485 connection standard PROFIBUS DP male connectors can be used For active termination these male connectors generally have a conne
95. CITE IBI tI ERI Lm 62 Connection to higher level systems ssssccsssscssssscessscessseecesssccessseecssssecessscecsssescesuscesssseecessesssssessssesssssscessssessssseeessssseessnesesees 62 Configuration via GSD files itsusi iernii niteni iaioa iaai i aii i i ie i e gaota Gateway redundancy masrier aeea aa es e aaia iniii a aiiai Function of the LEDS sssssssssssssseessssssssesseesseessessssseoreeeeessssssstesreeeess Special error scenarios with corresponding LED displays Gateway diagnosis sesscsssscssesccsesecssscecenscecessscecsnseecesseeceseeeeesee i Ice roeien M M EKE aE Ko rice Digital modules H 69 DMB80Ex digital I O module 8 channel sssssssssscsssccsseccssecsssccssecesseccsseccsseccnsecessecssscessueccsuscesueesecesuscessscessscessecessceesueessneeesseeesees 69 Configuration and data volume Connection figures Parameters sssesssseseseesessessseessseoesseorsseorsee st Channel specific module diagnosis ssssscssssscessesccssssecssssecessssecssssccessssecsssceeessscesssseeeesseceesnssssseseesssceesnscessnssecessssessnseesessseesane 73 Function ofthe EDS cetera ee eed aie cett asc diehied d uet d odio eee dt dtu Pat t ted ots 73 Technical data eei eure eta re t oec dr edad cod c doudou 74 DI4OEx digital input module 4 channel essessssssecsseecssecesseccssecessecessccce
96. Connection to higher level systems For PROFIBUS DP connection either fiber optic or copper cables can be used When using fiber optic cables select a suitable converter for fiber optic cable to R 485 The coupler system Segment coupler OC11Ex page 182 converts the RS485 signals to fiber optic cable signals The gateway can be operated with a max transmission speed of up to 1500 kBaud The module rack has a standard SUB D connector for bus connection excom can be connected and operated with the interface to the PROFIBUS DP per IEC 61158 to each host system that contains a PROFIBUS DPmaster Class 1 The PROFIBUS DP standards ensure that the configuration the parameterization the diagnostic messages as well as the cyclic data exchange between master and excom are processed For processing the acyclic services on the PROFIBUS DP the DPV1 expansions in excom are implemented With the help of GSD files all required behaviors for excom are defined on the PROFIBUS DP In addition the configurations and parameters of the individual modules are stored here For the configuration of excom the GSD files must be made part of the respective hardware configurator of the host system This guarantees that the PROFIBUS DP master is supplied with information and data sets valid for excom when configuration takes place D301266 0113 excom Gateway GDP NI head station Industr A Configuration via GSD files The gateway GDP NI
97. D9T RS485 Note Segment coupler and repeater put a physical load on the bus with their send receive connection Thus segment coupler and repeater must always be counted as participants when the segments are layed out D301266 0113 excom Segment couplers SC12Ex and OC 11Ex Industr A Figure 63 System structure excom Slave excom excom excom Master i RS485 Repeater DP IS coupler RS485 S Repeater RS485 Repeater RS485 DP connector 4 1 2 Repeater functionality of the segment coupler RS485 RS485Ex i DP connector with integrated terminating resistor DP IS coupler excom excom excom excom If a network with more than 32 participants exists one or more repeaters must be used Repeaters ensure physical processing of the signal by regenerating the signal amplitude and signal phase Repeaters divide the network into individual segments One network segment may contain 32 participants Repeaters provided that diagnostic repeaters are involved here do not have their own bus address These so called transparent bus participants also include the TURCK products SC12Ex and OC11Ex However such bus components represent physical participants and must be part of the calculati
98. Ex Equipotential bonding and shielding of the field current circuits General requirements for equipotential bonding e e tee teee teen teens ttes ttnat tton etos tton ttt soii n Use of the system enclosures eerte nn ttn nennt nnno ntt EE noto ttt toto ttt ttt notti stiano nis System enclosures EG VA 4655 460 x 550 x 260 mm etes teen tenni ntt ta tino tt nott sotto a tttst ttt so ttt no iion Dimensional drawing to EG VA 4655 esee eeeen tete tetto ttte ttt notte notte toten ttt no tttt ntt nostis noises noctis 203 System enclosure EG VA 6555 650 x 550 x 260 mm Dimensional drawing to EG VA 6555 sss System enclosure EG VA 8055 800 x 550 x 260 mm Dimensional drawing to EG VA 8055 w ssesssssssscssssscsssescesssscessseecsnssecessseccsnssecessuseessueecsnssessnsnecesnssesuuscsanssecesuusesensnsesensnseesseees 209 Instructions concerning the explosion protection certificates ecce ee eee eere ee eee eee e e eee eoo sou 211 Information for the evaluation of the U certificates oo ssssssssccsseccsscsssccsssecssscessscessecesseecssecesseccnsecsneesssesessessnseesnsessseees 211 System certification excom system enclosure sseeeccssesecssseccsseeecsssescesssccessseecesssecesnseecssscecsssnecssnseecsnsnecesseeecsnsecenaseessneseees 212 Information for system approval of the RS 485 IS Ex i layers
99. Ex Input module with status The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the input byte Table 35 Bit position of the input byte Bit assignment of the input byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit O Input byte SB 4 SB 3 SB 2 SB 1 Ch 4 Ch 3 Ch 2 Ch 1 SB Status Bit D301266 0113 excom 75 excom system components Connection figures Figure 34 Terminal assignment DIAOEx 76 terminal configuration connection possibilities Selectable channel 1 31 32 HW 33 34 channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 D301266 0113 excom Digital modules Industr A Parameters Note Please take the bit assignment DI40Ex page 268 Parameterization is done per channel Table 36 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for DI40Ex Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or deactivated monitoring off with the help of channels In case of a short circuit the respective channel LED is red Wire breakage on Wire breakage monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated with the help of channels In case of a wire breakage the respective channel LED is red Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid v
100. Figure 59 Dynamic determination of count direction IN advanced DIR y k Figure 60 Dynamic N determination of count direction IN lagging A a In addition determination of the count direction can be preset by the host system Here the input DIR is inactive The control byte of the DF20Ex P is assigned as follows Table 139 Bit 7 6 5 3 2 1 0 Output byte 1 of the DF20ExPfor Meaning Up down RSTOV MRS RST function block A 162 E Up down count direction 0 upward 12 downward E RST OV reset of overflow bit OV 0 overflow bit released 1 overflow bit is reset MRS with host control the count is switched off 0 counter locked 1 counter released RST counter reset 0 counter released 1 counter reset and locked Output byte 1 with analog structure controls function block B D301266 0113 excom Frequency counter module Industr A Function of the LEDs Table 140 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for this slot green Correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data green blinking fast The master is not in the data_exchange after configuration Channel off Channel not active not set yellow Channel switched act
101. GOST Type N Type R Type S Type T TypeU 75 75 mV 5 uV 1 2 4 1 2 V 100 uV Setting of sensor type Reference point none internal Pt100 on terminal external tight none There is no cold junction compensation internal Cold junction is compensated via Pt100 on the module Pt100 on terminal Cold junction is compensated via Pt100 on terminal on the module rack external tight Cold junction compensation occurs with the help of externally determined comparison temperature fixed value Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 6s 29 25 Wire breakage on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Substitue value min value Depending on the parameterization the strategy max value min value the max value or the last valid last valid value value is set Comparison 0 C Display of comparison temperature was temperature 10 C determined with external thermo element 70 C D301266 0113 excom Modules for temperature measuring Industr A o Note The parameter sensor type is used to set the thermal element types of the TI40Ex T Channel specific module diagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status o
102. IR B DIR B KR EE channel 5 GATE A DIR OUT A GATE B DIR OUT B channel 6 channel 7 RSTA ZERO A SHE channel 8 RSTB ZERO B E xar xax a B T Note o The channel specific display of the diagnosis via the LEDs in the front plate of the module does not correspond to the sequency of the pin assignment in the connection level Note Unused l Os of a used function block must be terminated or wire breakage short circuit monitoring must be deactivated otherwise the measurement value shows the substitute value 156 D301266 0113 excom Frequency counter module Industr A 3 11 2 DF20Ex F frequency module In this configuration the module sends a double value with measurement value and status for each function block Note o The measurement frequency of the DF20Ex is 4 kHz also when both function blocks are used simultaneously If automatic direction detection is parameterized in a function block f lt 1 25 kHz is valid for both function blocks Measurement input The raw value corresponds to the LONG INTEGER display where the resolution is 0 1 mHz per digit For conversion into Hz the status bits must be masked and the converted raw value must be divided by 10 000 This results in a fixed point number with 4 positions after the decimal point Negative frequences are transmitted as two s complement and must be chan
103. Liu qu 270 Liu 271 Link 271 ru 272 Lili M 272 AIHAOEX 4H 273 AIHAOEX 1H e 274 Lili 8H A MO 275 AIHA TEX 276 AIHA TEX 4H 277 AIHA TEX 1H Pem 278 AIHA TEX 8H P 279 AOHA4AOEX 4H m 280 AOHAOEX 1H 281 AOHAOEX BH e 282 un m 283 juna 285 TIA TEX qm 287 DF20EX F O 288 DF20EX P E 290 D301266 0113 excom 263 Addendum parameters Note The default values of the parameters are in bold
104. O 4 words AOHAO 1H 2 words 4 words AOHAO 4H 8 words 4 words AOHAO 8H 16 words 4 words T140 R 4 words TI4O T 4 words T141 4 words DF20 P 8 byte 2 byte DF20 F 8 byte 2 byte D301266 0113 excom Determination of the transmission rate and cycle time Industr A 6 12 Determination of the transmission rate and cycle time The PROFIBUS DP master determines the transmission rate used in the system Baud rates of 9 6 to 1500 kBaud are allowed The internal cycle time T for signal processing of a fully expanded excom system is for E binary signals 5 ms for MT16 10 ms for MT24 analog signals 20 ms for MT16 40 ms for MT24 In addition to the response time of the entire system the cycle times of the superior bus T and the process control system Tj are added Generally the following is valid T 22x T T Tps Ta response time T internal cycle time Ex link Tg cycle time of the superior bus Tp cycle time of the process control system D301266 0113 excom 249 excom Start up 250 D301266 0113 excom 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 7 1 4 7 2 Industr A Service Service and maintenance ecsesssesccccecosocccececosceccecscosccocecosocccececosoeccecscosccosecososccececosoessesscoscescesssosseo 252 ROULIME arse ir E EEEE I SENEE E A teddeey 252 Repairs Cleaning BIE 101E tee c
105. PROFIBUS DP E PROFIBUS DP for the cyclic exchange of data and the diagnosis PROFIBUS DP V1 for acyclic and cyclic exchange of data including alarm handling E PROFIBUS DP V2 for isochronous synchronous exchange of data PROFIBUS DP is internationally standardized Users and manufacturers have joined the PROFIBUS User Organization PNO and continue to drive standardization PROFIBUS DP has two different masters AClass 1 Master for initialization and the cyclic exchange of data as well as control of bus communication AClass 2 Master is a programming device that is connected to the bus for a certain period of time e g during start up of the installation They control additional services e g address assignment for slaves The master with bus access rights controls the data exchange with the help of the slaves assigned to it and according to the master slave process The master sends a telegram to the first slave that must immediately respond to it Then the master accesses the second slave that immediately responds again This process is continued by the remaining slaves Before a PROFIBUS DP network can start functioning it must be layed out and configured For these tasks many functions are generally available in the engineering tool of the control For planning and layout the engineering tool must recognize all devices in regard to their communication characteristics These characteristics are stored in the device master
106. Parameter name Parameter values Parameters for all channels 0 to3 Sensor type 0000 Pt100 IEC 751 0001 Pt200 IEC 751 0010 Pt400 IEC 751 0011 Pt1000 IEC 751 0100 Pt100 JIS 0101 Pt1000 JIS 0110 Pt100 SAM 0111 Pt1000 SAM 1000 Ni100 1011 Cu100 1101 0 30 O mQ 1110 0 300 Q 10mQ 1111 0 3 kQ 100 mQ 4 5 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 15s 10 2 6 s 11 29 2 s 6 7 Connection 00 2 wire 0 Q basis 01 2 wire 8 Q basis 01 3 wire 11 4 wire D301266 0113 excom TI40Ex T A 22 TI40ExT Industr A Table 214 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No TI40Ex T 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 reserved 0 1to3 Reference temperature 000 0 C 001 10 C 010 20 C 011 30 C 100 40 C 101 50 C 110 60 C 111 70 C 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring 0 on 1 off 7 reserved 0 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 D301266 0113 excom 287 Addendum parameters Table 214 Forts Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No TI40Ex T 4 Parameters for all channels 0to3 Sensor type 0000 Type B 0001 Type E 0010 Type J 00
107. R 28 50 N NAMUR craso aeda Susana Sua vague eese aae a ERE Te de EN 199 o Order information sssssesseceeceeeeeeseeaueeeeeeeeseeseeseeaeeaaenes 20 P Parameters EADLUSqe C 89 LI h Bgec e I 95 SAIB EX e 101 zxslubi qm nnna an 113 124 SAMA EX saraan cinia n iR EE RIEN MecUE FETU RE p DRE EUR FRF TERRE 124 enun 106 EJ 9lru2sqe MT 135 Piso P 160 164 Ap plug pe a NN 164 165 DIAQEX e 77 DMS OEX irinna nadd da 72 Liberia 83 STIAOEx issu ocn sire etu eap acid rad cda 144 152 Potential equalization eene 199 200 Power Connection drawings se 46 48 Connection terminals c cccccceceeeeceaeeaeenseseeeeeeeees 48 256 PPSAT115EX viccecccsesesesesesensseaeaeaeeeeeueeeeeseseeeeeseseneaea 44 198 293 zPPSA230EX daa nian Er et ren 40 198 dep lc 196 197 Redundangy seen eene mnn 38 Safety ica ient etn perg con dd ees 195 PROFIBUS DP Baud rate ct t altae Red bee 245 Connection ind DRE 37 224 Error codes per standard 242 explosion hazardous area cecer 177 185 Length of the bus cable seeeeene 245 N6 tWOIK donee 174 RS485 ers seirer iiai neiaa nennen nnn 176 177 185 R 485 lS 5s ente niea e re Lee p EAEN 177 185
108. Sense it Connect it Bus it Solve it T uEPCZEU Industrial Automation excom REMOTE I O FOR INTRINSICALLY SAFE CIRCUITS MANUAL Industr A Prior to installation Switch device off Ensure against accidental restart Verify isolation from the supply Ground and short circuit Cover or close off neighbouring devices that are live Observe the assembly and mounting instructions for the device Only qualified personnel is permitted to complete all work related to transportation installation start up and maintenance IEC 60 364 bzw HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and national accident prevention regulations When conducting installation work ensure that you are free of electrostatic charge before touching the device The function earth FE must be connected to the protective earth PE or the equipotential bonding The system installer is responsible for establishing this connection E Connection and signal cables must be installed in such a way that inductive and capacitive interspersions may not impact the automation functions E Automation technology equipment and their operating elements must be installed in such a way that they are protected from accidental operation In order to prevent undefined states in the automation equipment caused by cable and wire break on the signal side respective safety measures must be implemented on the hardware and software side when establishing the I O connection
109. Substitute values Substitute values for AIH41Ex Oto 20 mA Min value 0 mA Max value 21 mA 4to 20mA Min value 3 6 mA Max value 21 mA D301266 0113 excom 127 excom system components Channel specific module diagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the AIHA1Ex devices support the following channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 Seite 6 233 Table 102 Error code No Meaning Error codes Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage 7 Upper limit value exceeded 8 Lower limit value has not been reached Specific 16 Cable error 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent 30 HART status error 31 HART communication error excom sends two different HART error codes to the PLS Error code 30 and error code 31 E Error code 30 The HART variables are valid only information is issued that the HART device status is erroneous E Error code 31 The HART variables are invalid the HART communication is erroneous Table 103 AIH41Ex Error codes AIH41Ex Measurement value Error code Message text OmA lt I lt 2mA 16 Cable error 2mA I 3 6 8 Lower lim
110. Test Ca Vibration test per IEC 60068 2 6 Shock test per IEC 60068 2 27 D301266 0113 excom Digital modules Industr A 3 7 2 DI40Ex digital input module 4 channel Figure 33 DI40Ex The digital input module DI40Ex connects max 4 sensors per NAMUR EN 60947 5 6 or mechanical contacts When mechanical contacts are connected a respective resistance WM1 Ident No 0912101 switch must be done when wire breakage or short circuit monitoring are activated The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus can be used in connection with excom in Zone 1 The ignition protection class of the inputs is Ex ia IIC Thus field devices can be operated in Zone 0 Note Fieldbus power supply and channels are galvanically isolated The behavior of the inputs is parameterized via the PROFIBUS DP master Possible parameters are switching behavior input delay substitute value strategy wire breakage monitoring and short circuit monitoring Configuration and data volume The input module DI40Ex operates as a true input card with additional status bit for each channel When a status message is pending the status bit of the respective channel is set to Bit 5 Bit 8 set to 1 Short circuit or wire breakage are possible causes for setting of the bit Table 34 Input byte Output byte Type Configuration Configuration of the DI40Ex 1 Di40
111. The power supply units or power supply modules ensure that the entire system is supplied with current For the correct operation one power supply unit or power supply module is sufficient In order to increase availability an additional power supply unit or power supply module can be connected redundancy when the module rack MT16 MT24 is used Figure 2 Example configuration of a excom station A Power supply units redundancy possible Ex e connection for the external power supply under the cover Selection of the network address via the rotary switch Connections for PROFIBUS DP RS485 IS Connection layer for the intrinsically safe Ex i field devices Gateways I O modules different types integrated guide for module insertion slot coding LEDs for status and I Os Module rack with backplane Module front cover with mechanical coding A roammognuos o D301266 0113 excom 27 excom system components 3 2 Module racks module sub racks of the excom system 3 2 1 General information excom components are mounted onto module racks The excom module racks consist of a backplane and the rack system that is mounted in front of it The backplane distributes energy and transfers data and contains the connection layer for the field devices The module rack is available in a combined protection class Ex e and Exi and can be used in Zone 2 The module supply on the backplane is limited in such a way that spar
112. V 1 0 off 1 on 5 K3 SV 2 0 off 1 on 6 K4 SV1 0 off 1 on 7 K4 SV 2 0 off 1 on D301266 0113 excom 277 Addendum parameters A 14 AIHATEx Table 206 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No AIH41Ex 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 665 11 2925 2 3 HART status measurement 00 off 0 20 mA range 01 off 4 20 mA 10 on 4 20 mA 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 7 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 reserved 00000000 278 D301266 0113 excom AIH41Ex 4H A 15 AIH41Ex 4H Industr A Table 207 Parameter for AlIH41Ex 4H Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values No 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 65 11 2925 2 K1 SV3 O off 1 on 3 K1 SV4 O off 1 on 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 7 Cable monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1
113. able errors wire breakage short circuit are not transmitted from one segment to another Thus an interference free operation of all segments independent from each other is possible The coupler has six LED displays With the function Automatic Baud Rate Recognition Setting of a Baud Rate the coupler automatically recognizes the baud rate when the rotary switch is set to 0 In switch position 1 to 7 the baud rate can be set permanently Figure 65 F G Segment coupler SC12Ex topview TUD SC12E PTB 03 ATEX 2115 eo CE i 2 GO Ex injec S gt 9 aud pate Ups 3 71 V Us 42y E f I A ee lp 129mA Tus 20 470 C t 2 1920 4 8 Po 120 mw 3 4545 3 7 linear charactersbe ae b on i T 199 TURCK D 45466 Miihe an der Autr Gs 500 00 RS485 7 1900 00 t Bits B s not used 0 not used gt Shea A Connection PROFIBUS DP standard interface B Two connections for intrinsically safe PROFIBUS DP interfaces per RS485 IS C Shield connection capacitive or direct grounding D Two 3 pole plug adapters to connect the supply voltage E Grounding bolt with M5 thread F Rotary switch to select a baud rate or the mode Baud Rate Recognition G Marking ofthe device D301266 0113 excom 175 excom bus components 4 2 2 System design with the SC12Ex Figure 66 segment coupler SC12Ex system design DP V1 RS485 Master 1r SC12Ex
114. ace These converters are generally called segment couplers TURCK has two different types of segment couplers SC12Ex and OC11Ex The SC12Ex is based on copper wire transmission and has two intrinsically safe RS485 IS lines ready For example these can be used for line redundancy In contrast the OC11Ex initially converts the non intrinsically safe RS485 signals into optical signals that are sent to the Ex area via fiber optic cables At location normally at the first excom station a second OC1 1 converts these into electrical signals again D301266 0113 excom Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP Industr A 6 3 Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP 6 3 1 Gateway redundancy When two gateways and two bus cables are used uninterruptable communication is guaranteed even when one gateway and one bus cable fail If a gateway fails a switch takes place to the other one Note When replacing a defective gateway please note that the new device must have the same firmware and hardware revisions as the redundant gateway Figure 98 Host Gateway Master redundancy I PROFIBUS DP RS485 _ SC12Ex segment coupler Ex separation PROFIBUS DP RS485 IS Recommended connection components E PROFIBUS DP cable type CABLE 451B or CABLE 452B E Con
115. acent gateway can be activated with the help of the output data word YO Settings that are needed for the Yokogawa redundancy are being activated More details can be found in the application report excom integration in CentumVP CS3000 D301266 0113 excom Gateway GDP IS head station Technical data Industr A Table 20 Type code GDP IS FW2 x Technical data GDP IS Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 1W Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Ex approval per conformity declaration PTB 09 ATEX 2013 Marking 9 Il 2 G Ex ib IIC T4 Max values RS485 IS fieldbus connection Max output voltage U lt 3 6V Max output current lt 125 mA Max output power P lt 112 5 mW Characteristic curve linear Max input voltage U lt 4 2V Displays Operating readiness 1 x green red Int communication CAN 1 x yellow red Ext communication PDP Redundancy readiness PRIO 1 x yellow red 1 x yellow red Error message 1xred Protection class IP20 General information Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity lt 93 at 40 C per IEC 60068 2 3 Test Ca Vibration test per IEC 60068 2 6 Shock test per IEC 60068 2 27 External RS 485 fieldbus system Ignition protec
116. al descriptions Intrinsically safe current circuits must be layed separately from non intrinsically safe circuits they must be marked and wired to the terminals according to the connection diagrams of the I O modules Unused cable glands must be covered by Ex e certified plugs Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by explosion Prior to start up check the correct wiring of the excom system especially wiring and identification of the intrinsically safe current circuits The installer must show Proof of Intrinsic Safety per EN 60079 14 D301266 0113 excom 195 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area 196 Connection of the power supply to the PSD24Ex All components of the power supply for the excom system must be installed according to the requirements of ignition protection class e Increased Safety per EN 60079 7 The max approved wire width is E rigid 4 mm E flexible 2 5 mm The tightening torque is min 0 5 Nm and max 0 6 Nm The auxiliary power must be protected with a cable safety fuse of 10 A The regulations per der EN 60079 14 VDE 0165 Part 1 especially Chapter 11 of the standard additional requirements for ignition protection class e Increased Safety must be met The connections can be found under a IP30 cover Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock The cover must only be opened after the voltage has been switched off and after a wa
117. al information about OC1TEX ccsscssssssssessesssessesssessessesssessessesessesessnsssssnceascsucssscsucsucsesssussueesesucsucsucesecescessesscaneanceseeanceseenses 182 Additional characteristics iniecit dictt te ti iie i iiie prp saute dhnedsvaacisdaarbardaabsadisdlaasasbardsinarsaniens System design with OCT1Ex eren Male connector and bus termination on the OC11Ex Setting the baud rate via the rotary switch on the OC11Ex Converting the RS485 signal into the RS485 IS Ex i signal with the OC11EX esee eentteenttenntnnnn 185 EE DEGAS ry p M 186 Increasing system stability via redundancy switches with OC1TEx eese nne tenete nnt nnns 187 Technical data for OC11Ex 2G 2 and OC11Ex 3G 2 eese ennnnttennn kaiari AARRE RaRa 189 D301266 0113 excom 171 excom bus components 4 1 4 1 1 172 Segment couplers SC12Ex and OC11Ex General information about the segment couplers excom can be connected to every system with a PROFIBUS DP connection master functionality One of the requirements of process automation is to service and replace electrical equipment during operation In order to meet these requirements the PROFIBUS DP interface of excom has an intrinsically safe design Between PROFIBUS DP master and excom RS485 must therefore be changed to an intrinsically safe RS485 IS These converters are generally
118. alid the HART communication is erroneous Filter PT1 off 0 1s 2 65 29 25 Activation of a software filter to generate an average value 124 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Industr A In this configuration the module also sends 1 HART variable to the cyclic data communication Table 98 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AIHATEx 1H Cable monitoring on Cable monitoring is activated or deactivated off Substitue valuestrategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA HART status off 0 20 mA off 0 20 mA measurement range off 4 20 mA Dead zero without HART status request Wire on 4 20 mA breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 0 to the host system off 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system on 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request HART diagnosis active Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system excom sends two different HART e
119. also has GSD files They are available in German and English Use of GSD files page 245 The difference between both GSD file versions involves the use or rather support of DPV1 specific functions and key words for example in connection with the implementation of PNO redundancy Gateway redundancy When two gateways and two bus cables are used uninterruptable communication is guaranteed even when one gateway and one bus cable fail If a gateway fails a bumpless switch to the second gateway takes place this corresponds to line redundancy The system redundancy two Masters connected to one gateway via their own segment couplers is also supported Note o By using suitable host systems the configuration can be changed during operation Function of the LEDs With the help of the 5 front side LEDs status operating mode internal or rather external communication redundancy status and system configuration are displayed Here is an overview of the LED functions Table 21 LED behavior function LED Functions Status green Ready for operation off Not ready for operation no supply CAN yellow Internal communication ok red No communication via the backplane bus PDP blinking Invalid PROFIBUS DP address 000 yellow red No data exchange with PROFIBUS DP master yellow Data exchange with PROFIBUS DP master PRIO off Gateway is passive redundancy status yellow Gateway is active Config off Config
120. alue Polarity normal Activation or deactivation of the input signal inverted inversion De chattering off For de chattering mechanical contacts an 10 ms additional dampening of the input signals is 20 ms activated 50 ms Channel specific modulediagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the DI40Ex module supports the following channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 Table 37 Error code No Meaning Error codes Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage Specific 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent D301266 0113 excom 77 excom system components Function of the LEDs Table 38 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply blinking red Module is not configured for this slot green Correct operation 78 green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data Channel off Channel not active not set yellow Channel switched active red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present D301266 0113 excom Digital modules Technical data Industr A Table 39 Type code DI40Ex Te
121. alue strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The max value is 21 mA The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 Channel 1 SV1 SV4 on off Activation deactivation of the secondary variable Channel 2 SV1 SV4 on off SV1 4 of Channel 1 4 Channel 3 SV1 SV4 on off Note Avoid activation of more than 8 secondary Channel 4 SV1 SV4 on off variables The module only displays the first 8 activated secondary variables Depending on the measurement range setting the following substitute values are set when an error occurs Table 114 Measurement range Substitute values Substitute values for AOH40Ex Oto 20 mA Min value 0 mA Max value 21 mA 4 to 20 mA Min value 3 6 mA Max value 21 mA D301266 0113 excom 137 excom system components Channel specific module diagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the AOH40Ex module supports channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 Table 115 Error code No Meaning Error codes
122. ances D301266 0113 excom 3 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 3 2 8 3 2 9 3 2 10 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 44 3 4 5 Industr A excom system components Overview of system architecture ssecccoecccccccceccccccccccccccocccccccccccccocccccceccccccoccccccccccccccocccccececcscsoccoccceeee Module racks module sub racks of the excom system General information Type code T Module cta AU NN Topic XXX SS X Dimensional drawing of the module rack MT16 2G ssssssssccssssecssesecessscecssseccessscccsnseecsnseecensesecsnseecsnssscsseecesnsescensseceunseesene Module rack MT 163 io Dimensional drawing of the module rack MT16 3G sssssssssccsssecsssseccssssecssseecessssccsnseecsnseecesssseessseecsnssscuseeceunseecensescesnseesane Module rack MT24 3G eterne nnt ttnnnntts Dimensional drawing of the module rack MT24 3G Converter sub rack MT PPS eterne tnnnnnnenen Dimensional drawing of the converter sub rack MT PPS sssssssssssccssesecsssescessescessssccsnseecsnsescesnseecsnssscenseccunsescensescesnseesene Technical data of the module racks converter sub racks tete teen ttt nnn testo tts nostis notti Mounting the module racks ssssssccssssscssseecesssecesssecesnssess
123. and components The correct and safe operation of the devices requires appropriate transportation storage mounting and installation as well as careful service and maintenance 1 3 2 Information for project planning installation of the product Danger The safety and accident prevention regulations for the respective application must be followed D301266 0113 excom 15 General information 16 D301266 0113 excom Industr A 2 Introduction of the excom system 2 1 Performance characteristics of the excom system e eere eese eese eee eee ten nsns ease sees ens ss sss s eese eese snsnno 18 2 2 Overview of the excom componennts cccccccccccscccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccsccccccccccscccccccccccceccccsssscscccs 20 D301266 0113 excom 17 Introduction of the excom system 2 1 Performance characteristics of the excom system Figure 1 mee ee oaaae ee ELE Example of a EX Amm Em mm m Pi imr ie i n P Sm 0 0 Que Se Ga e f f em B D of s excom station pep se sis e s TET EIE e i e e ta Ce e e s LO 18 excom is a remote l O system for PROFIBUS DP for the use in explosion hazardous areas The system is equipped with bus compatible decentralized I O modules with protection class IP20 for the connection of binary and analog intrinsically saf
124. assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 0 K1 SV 1 0 off 1 on 1 K1 SV 2 0 off 1 on 2 K2 SV1 0 off 1 on 3 K2 SV 2 0 off 1 on 4 K3 SV 1 0 off 1 on 5 K3 SV 2 0 off 1 on 6 K4 SV1 0 off 1 on 7 K4 SV 2 0 off 1 on 284 D301266 0113 excom TI40Ex R A 21 TI40ExR Industr A Table 213 Parameter for TI40Ex R Byte No Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for Channel 1 0to3 4 5 Cable resistance Substitute value strategy 0000 basis 0 Q 0001 basis 0 5 Q 0010 basis 1 0 Q 0011 basis 1 5 Q 0100 basis 2 0 Q 0101 basis 2 5 Q 0110 basis 3 0 Q 0111 basis 3 5 Q 1000 basis 4 0Q 1001 basis 4 50 1010 basis 5 0Q 1011 basis 5 50 1100 basis 6 0Q 1101 basis 6 50 1110 basis 7 0Q 1111 basis 7 5 Q 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value Wire breakage monitoring O on 1 off Short circuit monitoring O on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 D301266 0113 excom 285 Addendum parameters Table 213 Forts Parameter for TI40Ex R 286 Byte No Bit No
125. ata DO401Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 45W Outputs 4 intrinsically safe actuators Switching frequency lt 100 Hz Short circuit lt 180 Q Wire breakage lt 1 mA Ex approval per conformity PTB 10 ATEX 2024 declaration Marking I12 1 G Exib ia IIC T4 1I 1 D Ex ia IIIC Ex max values field circuits Terminal 1 2 Terminal 3 4 Open circuit voltage Ug lt 25V 19V Short circuit current lo 80 mA 100 mA Max power P lt 750 mW lt 710 mW Characteristic curve angular angular Max external inductance IIC IIB IIC IIB capacity kgr Co LalmH CynF CoinF LalmH CyInF CoInF 2 350 2 1000 1 410 1 130 1000 0 5 500 0 5 140 1000 0 2 660 0 2 170 1000 0 1 110 820 x Max internal inductance L negligible Max internal capacity C negligible General information Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 at 55 C per EN 60069 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 Dimensions 18x 118 x 103 mm D301266 0113 excom 85 excom system components 3 8 Analog modules 3 8 4 AI401Ex analog input module 4 channel Figure 37 Analo
126. ata GDP NI Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply module Power consumption lt 1W Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Displays Operating readiness 1 x green red Int communication CAN 1 x yellow red Ext communication PDP 1 x yellow red Redundancy readiness PRIO 1 x yellow red Error message 1x red Protection class IP20 General information Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity lt 93 96 at 40 C per IEC 60068 2 3 Test Ca Vibration test per IEC 60068 2 6 Shock test per IEC 60068 2 27 68 D301266 0113 excom Digital modules Industr A 3 7 Digital modules 3 7 1 DMBSOEx digital I O module 8 channel Figure 31 DM80Ex The digital I O module DM80Ex connects NAMUR sensors EN 60947 5 6 and actuators When mechanical contacts are connected a respective resistance WM1 Ident No 0912101 switch must be done when wire breakage or short circuit monitoring are activated The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus is suitable for use in excom Zone 1 applications The ignition protection class of the I Os is Ex ia IIC Note When wiring please ensure that all inputs or rather outputs are connected respectively to one common potential this means the channels are not galvanically isolated from each other The behavior of the I Os is parameterized via the PROFIBUS DP master Possible parameters are switching behavior input delay subsi
127. ature module 4 channel Figure 52 TI41Ex eee i H Ax TE The temperature module TI41Ex connects 2 3 and 4 wire temperature resistors of types Pt100 Ni100 and Cu100 The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and can be used with excom in Zone 1 The ignition protection class of the inputs is Ex ia IIC Note The channels are galvanically isolated from each other The line resistance compensation that occurs when 2 wire temperature resistors are connected is a result of specified resistance values in connection with parameterization The setting of parameters e 9 like line monitoring substitute value strategy and attenuation can be done per channel and is exclusively initiated by the master Configuration and data volume The module TI41Ex operates as a true input card with an additional status bit for each channel When a status message is pending the status bit of the respective channel is set to 1 in the input word The status bit is set when an error occurs that initiates a diagnostic message The internal resolution of the module is 14 Bit the transmission with the PROFIBUS DP is also done with 14 Bit The analog input value is displayed as a number between 0 and 16383 The temperature value is represented as value in 1 10 Kelvin When converting into C an offset of 273 15 must be taken into consideration Table 127 Input byte Output byte Type Configuration Configuration of
128. ax power on the output Power analysis voltage 25 VDC on Connection 1 22 5 V 5 mA 112 5 mW 19 V 15 mA 285 mW For example the following versions are possible for terminal connection 3 4 Table 41 Voltage and max current with open circuit Max power on the output Power analysis voltage 19 VDC on Connection 2 16 V 25 mA 400 mW 14 V 35 mA 490 mW 12 V 45 mA 540 mW Load curve Table 42 Terminal connection 1 2 Load curve of the DO401Ex Uout V 25 20 15 10 5 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 lout mA Terminal connection 3 4 Uout V 25 20 0 10 20 30 40 50 lout mA D301266 0113 excom 81 excom system components Configuration and data volume The output module DO401Ex operates as a true output card Compared to the other digital cards the module does not have an additional status bit The 4 channels are assigned to Bit 1 4 of the output byte Bits 5 8 are not assigned Table 43 Input byte Output byte Type Configuration Configuration of the DO401Ex 1 DO401Ex Output module The following table displays the assignment of the individ
129. be installed within the scope ofthis certificate All used components are tested and certified according to a separate test certificate The installation or rather assembly is done in TURCK s factory to meet the required distances as well as air distances and creep distances So that the max temperature for the temperature class T4 is not exceeded the permitted max ambient temperature decreases depending on the output of the installed modules refer to characteristic lines in Completion of the temperatue test page 51 Information for system approval of the RS 485 IS Ex i layers The gateway GDP IS is an intrinsically safe gateway for PROFIBUS with RS485 IS interface When mounted in the Ex area Zone 1 and Zone 2 the use is specified A segment coupler must be used mounting in safe area The gateway GDP NI is a gateway for PROFIBUS with RS485 standard interface Use is only permitted when mounted in non ex areas N Non Ex The separation point to the intrinsically safe part of the system is integraged in the gateway I isolated A segment coupler is not required here Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by explosion If excom is operated as intrinsically safe system in the Ex range the segment coupler must be approved and the operator must provide Proof of Intrinsic Safety The installer must comply with the respective mounting instructions per EN 60079 14 and EN 60079 11 Further special conditions must not be
130. because of this integration Thus the joined operation of all components of the excom system with individual certificates is allowed in regards to formal approval Proof of Intrinsic Safety for the internal connection of the individual modules via the module carrier is not required because the testing laboratory already provided the respective evaluation in Section 15 of each certificate The evaluation of the power supply is individually listed in the certificate PTB 00 ATEX 2193 for the power supply unit PSD24Ex and in the PTB12 ATEX 2009 for the power supply module PSM24 3G as well as for the internal CAN Bus in the certificate of the module rack PTB 00 ATEX 2194 U Thus all components of the excom system can be operated without additional evaluation by the operator D301266 0113 excom 211 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area System certification excom system enclosure In order to save the operator from an individual evaluation of the assembled components TURCK received a system approval for stainless steel enclosures with built in module carrier With this approval the components were combined in a U Certification enclosure module carrier and line filter The I O fieldbus system consists of a stainless steel device with ignition protection class Ex e with a built in module carrier The module carrier can be populated with different modules In addition other pre wired components can
131. bit is set by the DP slave when the configuration data sent by the master do not make sense 3 Diag Ext Diag This bit is set by the DP slave If itis set to 1 the expanded diagnostic range has diagnostic data Ext Diag Data If it is set to 0 slave specific data may be present Ext Diag Data excom transfers its status per DP V1 and the identification relevant diagnosis with the help of this mechanism 4 Diag Not Supported This bit is set by the slave in case of an unsupported request 5 Diag Invalid Slave Response This bitis set by the DP master when it receives a wrong or implausible response from an addressed slave The DP slave resets this bit to O 6 Diag Prm Fault This bit is set by the DP slave if the last parameter telegram was erroneous e g wrong telegram length wrong Ident No invalid parameter 7 DIAG Master_Lock The DP slave was parameterized by a different master This bit is set by the DP master Class 1 when the address in byte 4 does not correspond to the address 255 and when it differs from the address of the master The DP slave resets this bit to 0 234 D301266 0113 excom Diagnoses per EN 61158 Industr A Table 170 Bit Name Meaning Bitassignmentin No byte 2 station_ status_2 o Diag Prm Req The slave must be newly parameterized 1 Diag Stat Diag If this bit was set by the DP slave the master must static diagnostics request diagnositc i
132. bits for flange bit switch Byte 1 not assigned Table 166 Bit 10 Meaning Status switch with bit 220 11 01 The passive gateway is the receiver The passive gateway requests control from the active gateway and becomes active 11 10 The active gateway is the receiver The active gateway passes the control to the passive gateway and becomes passive Table 167 Bit 2 Meaning Status switch with bit 2 1 11 01 The left gateway is the receiver The left gateway requests control from the right gateway and becomes active 11 10 Theright gateway is the receiver The right gateway requests control from the left gateway and becomes active 232 D301266 0113 excom Diagnoses per EN 61158 Industr A 6 7 Diagnoses per EN 61158 6 7 1 Principle of the diagnostic messages A slave informs the master about the status via the diagnostic telegram During start up the master therefore recognizes whether the slave is ready for data exchange or whether initialization errors are present In the status DataExchange a PROFIBUS slave then sends diagnostic data when the diagnostic buffer changes e 9 via peripheral wire breakage The excom gateway sends messages to the master about arriving and leaving errors 6 7 2 Structure of the diagnostic telegram The structure of the diagnostic telegram corresponds to PROFIBUS DPVO with the expansions DPV1 The device specific diagnosis per DPVO is replaced with the status diagnosis per DPV1 Dur
133. bonding PA The shield of the fieldbus cable is applied onto a central position in the measuring station to which the equipotential bonding is also connected from this position on separate laying of shield and PA refer to Figure 77 The supply cables and fieldbus cables are to be led across separate line routes or shielded supply cables are to be layed with a min distance of 30 cm to the fieldbus cable l Figure 76 safe area l explosion hazardous area Installation without I separate isolating equipotential host transformer i bonding l I I I I I I I I I i I Figure 77 safe area I explosion hazardous area Installation with I separate isolating i equipotential host transformer equipotential bond 2 6 mm bonding equipo 200 D301266 0113 excom Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area Industr A 5 4 7 Use ofthe system enclosures If the system is used in Zone 1 an Ex e approved system enclosure with protection class IP54 or higher must be used The customer is responsible for the installation into an enclosure that meets the requirements per EN 60079 0 according to the instructions in the operating manual During installation heat development inside the enclosure must be checked Note i Zone 2 only requires one enclosure with protection class IP54 that meets the requirements of EN 60079 0 and EN 60079 15 Ex e enclosure is not required With the excom system table F1
134. ccccsccccccccrcccccccccrccscccccccccccccccccccccccccescccscccsccccccccescccceccccsscccscccescccscccesccecs 192 Conformity to standards of excom sssseccoeccecccccccccoccccccccccoccoccccccccccoccocccecccoccoccoccceccccccecccccceccsccsoccoee 193 Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area eee e eee eee eee eee eee seen sese e esee esee eese eee se eene 193 Connection of the PLC programmable logic controller or SPC stored program control sss 193 Connection of the supply tetti tte denis hesvsssdennsndentnsecoavacdnntevsechsevieusaisasseds eek TUR on ee ee ee Ure eee Eneas Connection of the peripherals sss Connection of intrinsically safe field current circuits Regulations for use in Zone 1 Zone 2 and in the safe area Iristr ctions for installatlOl can eorr tr rete ec ret een aaa eee et E ID Eee e TR RW e eb ett Ede voces Connection of the power supply eeecssccsssscsesceseeccssscssseecsscesseccssccssccesscecsusecsssccssscessessssecessessssesseesascesssccsasecsaseceseeesneeesneessaees Connection Of the cables m Connection of the power supply to the PSD24EX ou eeessssssssssscssseecsseccsssccssecssnecessecessecsssessssccsssecesscesseecaseceaseceaeeesneeesneeesaeees Connection of the power supply to the PSM24 3G essen ttentttnncts Connection of the power supply to the PPSA230Ex or the PPSA115
135. ccsnseecssssecssssccesssceessssesssssccesssceessssceesssceesnseeeesssceesnseecsnssecessseesaneseeesse 86 Connection figures nesteecrete adita ei ed ed quies utt o HOUSE rte to te tub tere nte tito 88 D301266 0113 excom 3 8 2 3 8 3 3 8 4 3 9 3 9 1 3 9 2 3 9 3 Industr A uiid M Channel specific module diagnosis eese nnne nnne ENEAN KANAANAN AAAF ttts ttis nnn tts notte no nttts nones Function OF the LEDS p Technical data ees AI41Ex analog input module 4 channel Configuration and data volume is Connection figures repite diandpsudieu iia i Mn He d reete Hen er ERR Er RR E zXnuiclsmett Channel specific module diagnosis ettet teen tte ttes ttts tetto ttt ttti ttt notis notte notet nones Function ofthe LEDS eiaa Technical data sens AI43Ex analog input module 4 channel Configuration and data volume T AEA a RE Paramete Sariani ER Channel specific module diagnosis ou sssssssesecsssescessseecssssccessssecssssecessesecsssseeesusscesnssecssseecssunessuecessussessnseeesseecesnneseesneceesneeees Function OF the LEDS p aa Technical data een AO401Ex analog output
136. chnical data DI40Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 1W Inputs per NAMUR EN 60947 5 6 Open circuit voltage 8 VDC Short circuit current 4 mA per input Switching threshold on off typ 1 8 mA 1 3 mA Ex max value Switching frequency binary input lt 50Hz Short circuit lt 3670 Wire breakage lt 0 1 mA Ex approval per conformity PTB 02 ATEX 2032 declaration Marking II2 1GD G Ex ib ia IIC T4 capacity L C Open circuit voltage U lt 87V Max output currentl lt 9 6 mA Max output power P lt 21 mW Characteristic curve linear Max external inductance IIC IIB Do Lo mH C luf C uF 2 0 0 9 5 1 1 0 1 1 6 1 0 5 1 3 7 3 0 2 14 8 6 Max internal inductance negligible General information Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 at 55 C per EN 60069 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 D301266 0113 excom 79 excom system components 3 7 3 DO401Ex digital output module 4 channel Figure 35 DO401Ex 80 The digital output module DO401Ex connects intrinsically safe actuators like valves with on status and off status
137. com Analog HART compatible modules Industr A Table 84 cont Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AIH40Ex 1H HART variable primary Selection of the HART variables secondary 1 secondary 2 secondary 3 secondary 4 HART variable of Channel 1 Selection of the channel No belonging to the channel Channel 2 HART variable Channel 3 Channel 4 AIH40EX 4H Note Please take the bit assignment AIH40Ex 4H page 275 In this configuration the module also sends 4 HART variables to the cyclic data communication Table 85 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AIH40Ex 4H Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Wire breakage on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The max value is 21 mA The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 Channel 1 SV1 SV4 on off Activation deactivation of the secondary variable Channel 2 SV1 SV4 on off SV1 4 of Channel 1 4 Channel 3 SV1 SV4 on off Note Avoid activation of more than 4 secondary Channel 4 SV1 SV4 on off variables The module only displays the first 4
138. com components All components of the excom are labeled with E Approval No of the EC type examination certificate E CEmarking Manufacturer ID D301266 0113 excom 253 Service 254 D301266 0113 excom 8 2 8 3 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 Industr A excom Accessories Blind module BM1 PRRRRRRRRRRRR 256 Power supply unit cover BM PS ccccccccccccscsccccsscccccccscccccccccccccsccccceccccccccssccccccccsccscccccccsccccccssccsses 256 VSN ATION SD EET ERECTUS n 257 EUST M2OEX DlaStle cust ee in em RR e WEAR RIO REGE WR WI 257 ELVA M20EXx stainless steel wiccscssscsscsscssssssssesscssssssessesessssssssssssssssssssssssesssssesscsessssessusscssesssussesssssessssessssssssscsessssssssessessessesseees 257 Terminal Blockin T 258 Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU wciccccsscscsscssssscssssssssssssscssssssssesscsesssssssessssesssssssessssessessesssssessssscsscsessssssssssesssssessssessossssesses 258 Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU crnini iania bees eve s berto ANRE AKNA T 258 D301266 0113 excom 255 excom Accessories 8 1 Blind module BM1 The blind module BM1 is for empty slots on the module rack Figure 104 Blind module BM1 8 2 Power supply unit cover BM PS For the unpopulated power supply unit or AC DC converter slot there is the power supply unit cover BM PS Figure 105 Pow
139. com system must be installed per the requirements of ignition protection class i Here comply with the regulations of EN 60079 14 VDE 0165 Section 1 especially Chapter 12 additional requirements for ignition protection class i intrinsic safety The manufacturer must show Proof of Intrinsic Safety per EN 60079 14 for the field current circuits The connection is done according to the respective connection diagram of the module D301266 0113 excom 193 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area 5 4 4 Regulations for use in Zone 1 Zone 2 and in the safe area 5 4 5 194 If the system is used in Zone 1 or Zone 21 an Ex e approved system enclosure with protection class IP54 or higher must be used Zone 2 requires an enclosure with at least protection class IP54 it must be designed per 60079 15 and EN 60079 0 For use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 the system must only be installed into an enclosure that has been approved for areas with dust protected by housing The installer must ensure that the requirements of EN 60079 31 are met e g in regard to dust deposits and allowable temperature The installation is done according to the instructions in the operating manual use an enclosure that meets EN 60079 0 requirements With both installations the heat that develops inside of the enclosure must be checked Alternatively the installation into enclosures of the series EG VA can be done at the factor
140. couplers SC12Ex and OC171EX esee ee ee eee eeeeen oo sese esee eene nass osse sees esses osos osse esee ee eeno 172 General information about the segment couplers eere tenente nnt ntts nn tts ntis ntis netiis notet notis 172 Repeater functionality of the segment COUPLED ssessccssssecsssseceseesccsnssecsstsscessssessnssscessseessnseecessssceunsecsnseecsnsssceunseecenseeesunseseeate 173 Segment JdJ General information about SCT2 Ex asii reiii iian n iai NEEN Ea Sinsi siie System design with the SC12EX sssscssssccssccseccsescessecsseecsssecssseccssccssscessscesucessccessceesucssuccssnessesessesssseesssusseseesessesansessnseesseassnseesses Redundant interface and supply voltage on the SC12EX ettet tente tttts ntn tts ettet istis ns tttissistts satis Male connector and bus termination on the SC12EXx ee eene teen tense notes sit tts ette si ttis sinite sanis Baud rate setting via the rotary switch on the SCT12Ex se eese teent tton tttsnn tte no tts tt tite ss ti tits tatto ss antis sanis Converting the RS485 signal into the RS485 IS Ex i signal with the SC12bEx BADE E P Increasing system stability via redundancy connections with SC12EX technical data of the SCT2EX e Segment coupler OC11EX 182 Gener
141. csseccsssecsuscessecessecessecssscessccssssessnsessseseseessseesssesssssessneeesees 161 D301266 0113 excom 3 11 4 3 11 5 3 11 6 3 12 3 13 3 13 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 2 6 4 2 7 4 2 8 4 2 9 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 D301266 0113 excom Industr A Static LUrubhE E sal DY TVA evaliatiQniss esee E O E MA MORE m Edd heuriurdBdb e icum Substitute values and validity of measurement values for DF20Ex Channel specific module diagnosis eee 7 ize Use of the blind module BM1 eee e eee e eee eo eene eene eese ee eo ee esee ee eese ee eee ees eee eee eee eee sess esee ee 168 Module replacement during operation coding pins cccccccccscccsssccccscccccccccscccccccccsscccscccccccecs 169 Mechanical COIN eet 169 excom bus components c eeeeeee eese eee e e osse eese eese sososssssss assesses sessssssssssssssssseesesessssssssssss 17 1 Segment couplers SC12Ex and OC171EX eee e ee e eee eee een nnne seas esee eso ss ese s esee ee esso so ss sess sese sese sno 172 General information about the segment couplers eese te
142. cssssecsssssccssescesseseesnseecessescesnsecessseecsnsescesnseecsnseecsnsescesnseecenseeesunseseeute 231 Output word for forcing a redundancy switch etienne entrent nnno tte nont ttt no ttts nin ttt toin tts no ttts noctis 232 Diagnoses per EN 61158 ee ee cete eee eee ee eee ette ee eee eese ee eese eese sese esee eee eese ees ee ese se senes esos es ose osse s sssose Principle of the diagnostic messages essent tenente nennt ntt notti NE Structure of the diagnostic telegram Status diagnosis reete Structure status H machine sss Identification specific diagnosis Channel specific diagnosis sss Structure of the alarm component Error codes per PROFIBUS DP standard Manufacturer specific error CODES e ssssscsssscsssecsssecsnsccssscessscessscessecessecssscessuccesuecesuecessecessecssscessscesssccsuscesssccescessessusessnceessecesseestees Redundancy status with line redundancy and system redundancy eterne tnnt 244 Dependance of bus length from the baud rate eee eere eee eene ee eee nn enne senes esee sensns sess esee eee ens 245 YI 245 Data formats with excom eee e eee ee eene eene nenne ee eee e eee eese sesso ee e
143. csuessnecsssccsscsssccssessseessessnsesscseseeesees 149 Config ration and data volume e etse net cep seit reete tertie tendente ete tice ire eie reet e 149 Error message via status bit of the data telegram eese teen tete tnnt tennis ntis ttenotttts nonis 150 eser re S 151 aicut M 152 Channel specific module diagnosis sieisen tette ana netto E G ira oiaoi aiies notte notis nones 153 FUNCTION OF ThE LEDS AL M 153 Technical data t RN obtu atu re Met dete RR RH Ie Dr TR 154 Frequency counter module eese Leser ee eene enne esee ee eee ee en soa s eese sese eese toss osos esee eaae eee eoo osos esee eee e e eeno 155 DF20Ex frequency module or rather counter module eese tiennent ttennttttnnttttnstktensnktennnt 155 Count and frequency functionality eese teret tenent teen ttte notte nette titt ii ttis stitit sss ttssasttts santi 155 Count and frequency functionality eee eeeenn tenente enennttennnietenetee ttis ni ittis 155 Connection IAG FAINT 3 etie EE E code ee Nossa civobastsbedoetnvebetsieds 156 DF20Ex F frequency module 157 Measurement INPUT eese entente tentus 157 Input and determination of rotating direction 158 Static evaluation aerea ena E AN 158 Dynamic evaluation 158 Function of the LEDS v eterne eee ege e eed EA A AE A EAA 159 EACH re E A A E AAEE A 1
144. ctable resistance combination e g D9T RS485 Ident No 6890942 The intrinsically safe RS485 IS connection requires the PROFIBUS DP male connector D9T RS485IS Ident No 6890944 This male connector also has a connectable termination resistance to terminate the network D301266 0113 excom Segment coupler OC 11Ex 4 3 4 Setting the baud rate via the rotary switch on the OC11Ex Industr A Table 152 Baud rate und rotary switch positioning on the OCTTEX Rotary switch position Baud rate Max segment length m Position 0 automatic baud rate recognition Position 1 9 6 kBaud 1200 Position 2 19 2 kBaud 1200 Position 3 45 45 kBaud 1200 Position 4 93 75 kBaud 1200 Position 5 187 5 kBaud 1000 Position 6 500 kBaud 400 Position 7 1 5 MBaud 200 Position 8 not assigned Position 9 not assigned 4 3 5 Converting the RS485 signal into the RS485 IS Ex i signal with the OC11Ex The PROFIBUS DP interface in the explosion hazardous area must meet the requirements for Intrinsic Safety Since excom can be operated in Zone 1 and the requirement exists to separate the gateway from the bus during operation the RS485 IS Ex i layer is used here The interface is designed per the code of the PNO working group RS485 IS A galvanic isolation of the transmission paths is required and guaranteed with the help of the coupler pair OC11Ex The fiber optic cable coupler i
145. cuit voltage U lt 55V lt 1 2V Short circuit current lt 25 mA lt 50 mA Max power P 35 mW 60 mW Characteristic curve linear Max internal inductance L negligible negligible Max internal capacity C 60 nF negligible IIC IIB IIC IIB Max external inductance Lo mH Co uF C UF C uF C uF capacity Lo Co 2 0 2 6 15 1 6 9 8 1 0 2 9 17 1 9 12 0 5 3 6 21 2 3 14 0 2 4 5 27 3 0 19 General information Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 at 55 C per EN 60069 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 154 D301266 0113 excom Frequency counter module Industr A 3 11 Frequency counter module 3 11 1 DF20Ex frequency module or rather counter module Figure 54 DF20Ex Count and frequency functionality The module is operated in the operating modes Counter and Frequency Input and therefore is used to count impulses or measure the frequency of binary impulse sequences Setting of the count direction direction detection reset as well as release can be done externally via a control input or internally by setting the control bit The frequency or rather couter module DF20Ex is equipped with 8 channels that are combined to two function blocks The inputs can be connected with NAMUR se
146. cy increased system stability is guaranteed with the help of two segment couplers In comparison Version 3 with system redundancy with two PROFIBUS DP masters and two segment couplers represents a continuous redundancy to the gateway in which an error does not lead to data loss Figure 67 Non Ex area Version 1 with Master line redundancy and gateway l redundancy SC12Ex Ex area aed excom f TRETEN EXUEERIEEUEEETTEEE DP connector DP connector with integrated terminating resistor D301266 0113 excom 179 excom bus components Figure 68 Non Ex area Version 2 with Master line redundancy and gateway redundancy with two segment couplers SC1 ic SC12Ex Ex area DP connector DP connector l l with integrated l l terminating resistor Figure 69 Non Ex area Version 3 with Manter Master system redundancy Re ae d with two PROFIBUS DP masters and two segment couplers 180 SC12Ex 1 Ex area DP connector DP connector with integrated terminating resistor
147. d Wire breakage on Short circuit monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA HART status off 0 20 mA off 0 20 mA measurement range off 4 20 mA Dead zero without HART status request Wire on 4 20 mA breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 0 to the host system off 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system on 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request HART diagnosis active Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system excom sends two different HART error codes to the PLS Error code 30 and error code 31 Error code 30 The HART variables are invalid only information is issued that the HART device status is erroneous Error code 31 The HART variables are invalid the HART communication is erroneous Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 114 D301266 0113 ex
148. d current circuit cables are used the shield can be placed onto the shield bus that is integrated in the excom module rack The shield bus must be integrated into the equipotential bonding via a PA bridge with a wire diameter of min 4 mm central or via a separate conductor in the control room Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by explosion For grounding and shielding in the Zones 0 1 and 2 or 21 and 22 the respective installer regulations per EN 60079 14 must be met Grounding of the shield of field devices depends on the requirements of the respective field device If the shield must be applied on both sides special consideration must be given to the equipotential bonding Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by explosion Basically a shield application on both sides in the explosive area must not be done without sufficient equipotential bonding D301266 0113 excom 199 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area General requirements for equipotential bonding
149. d ventilation bolts are used The operator must ensure that during cable installation at least protection class IP54 is followed Thefollowing installation instructions for the TURCK stainless steel field enclosures must be adhered to E The enclosures must be installed in such a way that the screws are at the bottom E The window on the enclosure must not be damaged to ensure correct operation Ambient conditions during the installation The permitted ambient temperature range of the excom modules and components can be found in the individual certificates After installation into a field enclosure it must be ensured that the permitted ambient temperature of the used modules or rather components is not higher than the ambient temperature of the field device during operation The enclosure must have adequate ventilation Here it is important to take into consideration the internal power loss inside the field enclosure Note o The power loss that is shown by the characteristic curves figures 23 and 24 results from the fact that the nominal values internal power consumption of the individual modules are added Here the additional power loss of the power supply unit s or power supply module s has been taken into consideration External thermal sources like solar radiation for example have not been taken into consideration If additional components are installed into the housing next to the excom system their power must also be taken i
150. delectet eae e bt eO He Deo t rminal block STBTO A4RS71 5 BU adita eed tcn eate e teresa A deg edo aea dee OA ei Ru Terminal block STBT6 4RS 1 5 BU 1 eet eet neret ee ee eee ee epa le veg cba deae ete UU REL at Gateway GDP IS head station eee eee Leere eee eee eee eee eee eee no sooo see eese seen naso osse e eee ee eee s osse sese eese eno General information Connection to higher level systems Configuration via GSD files tete eter oreesa ete tte ended dene den lr hag densae deed dust poda Gateway Feet e Function of thel EDS smnaintean a an eure cese oe o d eMe ae aa aded TE spado eR Special error scenarios with corresponding LED displays ccsssssssssecssecsseceseecsnsccsnscessccessecesseceesecsuecsnesssnsesnesssneessessne 57 Gateway diagnosis Parameters Technical data Gateway GDP NI head station eee eee eene eee een ne eee esee teet teens soos ee aea ee eee tens o osse ee esee eee ee esso sse eaae e e 62 a General information saren E detinent quiin E Aol a a a a 62 Connection to higher level systems ssssccsesscssssscesesccsssseccssssccssseecssseceessececsnssscessscecsnseecessessuscesssssecssnscessnssecesssecsnseeecsnseesene Configuration via GSD files erso rar ON EA RE E O O Gateway redundancy Function of the LEDs Special error scenarios with corresponding LED displays S Gateway diagnosis r
151. dress switch Assignment of internal module address sessssssssccssssecssssscessscecssseessssecesnseesesssccesnscecsnseesesssccssnscessseessnseceesssecesnseceesnseessneseees Access to the l O addresses connection to PROFIBUS DP on the module rack sssscssssesssecsssecssscccsccesscccesccesseccsnccesnscessecessecesueccssesuseesssccesceceaeeceaseesneesasees Supply of the excom system t 38 Gen ral Ife TES Power supply units or power supply module LtyPES cssescssesccssecsseeccseccsseccsnecessecessecessecssscessseesssccssccessseessuccssuccesecessecessesssees connection of the supply voltage via Ex e connection terminals eerte tenente tento Power supply unit CI DP A o RR Red ndancy of PSD24EX erect et t eR e REY ERE Ye ERE REA YER ERE WEE EUR WEE VER D RE NE eS Mounting of the power supply units PSD24Ex to the backplane MT16 2G Technical data PSD24Ex Power supply module PSM24 3G T Redundancy of PSM24 3Q etre anr retinere et e Yo V Yo E VERE HE etedasvichisversdasvechasveteds Technical data PSM24 3G CRM AC DC converter PPSA230Ex or rather PPSA1 15 EX sssscsssscssssecssesssseccssccssescescccsssecsnsecsusecsssessnscessceesuscessccasecssecessessnecsnsessnseeste Redundancy of PPSA230Ex or rather PPSA1 15EX sssssssssccssssscssssscessesecssseecessscecssseecessseccsnseecsnssecesnseecunsecens
152. ductor E All covers and doors must be closed during operation D301266 0113 excom 3 D301266 0113 excom 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 3 2 8 3 2 9 3 2 10 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 D301266 0113 excom Industr A General information ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccccccccsccsccscccccssccccccccccccccccsccsccsceccs TD Documentation CONCEPT 14 Explanations of the symbols that were used essssccseccoccccccccccoccoecccccccccocccoccccccccccoccoccecccccccoccoccecccssse 14 General InstructiOns cccccccccscccsecssccccccccccccccsccccccccccccccccccceccccscccccccsccccsccsccccccsscccccccsccccccccccccccceees 15 Intended Useren sree onc aera eRe EA AM 15 Information for project planning installation of the PrOCAUCt eessscssesecsecsseccseecsseecsseecsssecsssccsnscessecsseessueessneessneeesseessees 15 Introduction of the excom system eee eee e eee ee eene eene esos esos osos sese sese sesesesesesesesseeeeeeeeeeees 17 Performance characteristics of the excom system ccccccccscccsccccccccccccccccccccscccccccsccccsscccscccsccscccses 18 Overview of the excom components ccce esee eee ee ee eee eene eee ee eee eso osa sete esee eso POP eee esee se Pe e eese sess e
153. e avoiding the use of flammable liquids increase of flash point limiting the concentration to safe levels through natural and technical ventilation monitoring the concentration The primary method of protection is not described in this brochure Please refer to the explosion protection regulations of the professional association of the chemical industry Ex RL and the EN 1127 1 Explosion protection secondary The secondary method of explosion protection comprises measures which prevent ignition of a dangerous atmosphere Here constructive or electrical techniques are used to E segregate the electrical equipment which could ignite a dangerous mixture by keeping the explosive atmosphere away from the ignition source prevent an explosion by impeding the propagation to surrounding explosive atmosphere HCIR hot configuration in run Exchange of modules hot swapping and expansion of configuration configuration in run during ongoing operation Category ia Category ia indicates that the electrical equipment should not be able to cause an ignition under normal operating conditions in the event of a single fault or any combination of two faults Intrinsic safety must be ensured even when two independent faults occur at the same time For this reason components used to limit the electrical energy or protective parts of an apparatus of category ia must be present in triplicate Category ib An electrical apparat
154. e 20 70 C Relative humidity lt 95 at 55 C per EN 60068 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 Dimensions without mounting angle BxHxT mm 440 x 260 x 380 x 260 x 525 x 260 x 110 x 260 x 130 130 130 130 D301266 0113 excom Module racks module sub racks of the excom system Industr A 3 2 8 Mounting the module racks The rack system is made of extruded aluminum sheath This guarantees increased stability and shielding The module racks are suitable for wall mount Danger Possible injuries to persons because of incorrect use There are Ex e and Ex i circuits on the module rack The module rack must only be transported and stored in its original packaging Do not mount damaged devices or devices that are no longer in their original condition after incorrect handling The module racks are mounted with M6 screws or M6 bolts Attention Possible damage to enclosures caused by incorrect mounting For mounting in a stainless steel enclosure special sliding nuts type GM306 and threaded pins type GS406 are needed together with M6 screw nuts per DIN 934 D301266 0113 excom 35 excom system components 3 2 9 Address switch on the module rack and addressing PROFIBUS DP address switch In a PROFIBUS DP network a participant here excom station is identified via a bus address Addresses 01 to 99 99 participants for MT16 3G or rather MT24 3G may be
155. e e eese eee eoo sees eee eoe esee eee e eee O eee Data formats of the digital modules Data formats of the analog modules Use of HART variables s COu crr 247 Configuration of the gateway eterne tentent tento tetto Arriaka tosta ttettottteno tto no ONKAAN tetto R itte 247 Configuration of the l O modules eere teret nonet non tts nn tttt notet no ttts nin ttt notte nont tts no ttts notis nonis 248 Determination of the transmission rate and cycle time eeeee eee ee eee eee esee ee eee e eteen asse eese eese ee eno 249 D301266 0113 excom 221 excom Start up 6 1 222 Characteristics of the PROFIBUS DP The PROFIBUS DP Process Field Bus for Decentralized Periphery is used to trigger sensors and actuators with the help of a centralized control in automation technology It is recognized for its enormous capability and broad scalability The PROFIBUS DP is a typical universal bus with high transmission speed real time capability and cross communication E a protocol aligned with safety The breadth of possible applications for PROFIBUS DP requires a certain overhead in the telegram structure and considerable planning As a true sensor actuator bus the PROFIBUS DP would be too expansive In the course of time and with continuing development multiple versions were created for the available basic funcions of
156. e field devices The Ex protection type of the system permits its use in Zones 1 and 2 per EN 60079 10 and Zones 21 and 22 per EN 61241 10 The field current circuits are approved for the Zones 0 1 and 20 and 21 The system consists of power supply units or power supply modules gateways I O modules as well as module racks to accommodate all components The connection of all modules is user friendly Gateways power supplies and I O modules are plugged into the module rack Thus all internal connections are established only the external voltage supply and the periphery must be connected The backplane is an integral part of the module racks The backplane serves to distribute energy and to transfer data Module racks have two different sizes to accommodate a maximum of 16 modules and 2 gateways MT16 or 24 modules and 2 gateways MT24 The module racks are available for a 24 VDC supply voltage and with the converter sub rack MT PPS optionally for an AC supply of 230 115 VAC The connection level of the field current circuits is equipped with removable screw terminals or cage clamp terminals The power supply units or power supply modules ensure that the entire system is supplied with current For the intended operation one power supply unit or power supply module is sufficient In order to increase availability an additional power supply unit or power supply module can be connected redundancy when the module rack MT16 MT24 i
157. e must the output voltage U of a participant exceed the permitted input value Uj of a participant E The max current in the bus system is firmly defined as l 4 8 A However each participant can only provide an approved max current of l The sum of the values of the existing bus participants must thus be smaller than 4 8 A First the evaluation of the output voltages U on the bus system is completed In order to continue the previous example a comparison follows of the voltages U of the individual participants only active participants no male connectors those are passive to the determined max value U 4 2 V E PROFIBUS DP segment coupler SC12Ex PTB 03 ATEX 2115 Us 7 3 71 V PROFIBUS DP Gateway Type GDP IS PTB 09 ATEX 2013 U 3 60 V Valid is Uigus gt Uomax and therefore in this case 4 2 V gt 3 71 V thus the voltage evaluation of the bus system is acceptable In addition the individual current values of the fieldbus participants are added in order to evaluate whether the max current of the bus system is also acceptable under the assumption that only components of the remote l O system excom were used we determine the sum current with the max No of excom stations which can be operated on the segment coupler E PROFIBUS DP segment coupler SC12Ex PTB 03 ATEX 2115 ly 129 mA PROFIBUS DP Gateway Type GDP IS PTB 09 ATEX 2013 125 mA For the evaluated fieldbus sys
158. e output data word are used as status and control register of the gateway These status descriptions are used to indicate for example which of the two gateways is active and which is passive when the redundancy is switched If a gateway fails this status information can be collected and as a measure the adjacent gateway can be activated with the help of the output data word The following configurations are possible Table 191 Configuration possibilities ofthe gateway Gateway description in the Input words Output words GSD file T FF9F GDP 0 0 GDP C Cyclic data 1 word 1 word GDP YO Cyclic data 1 word 1 word D301266 0113 excom 247 excom Start up 6 11 2 Configuration of the I O modules The following table shows the differences between the module versions In addition it contains information about the volume of the input and output data Table 192 Data volume 248 T FF9F gsd gsg Input data Output data DMSOE 1 byte 1 byte DM80 S 2 byte 1 byte DM80 8l 1 byte DM80 S 8l 2 byte DI40 1 byte DO401 1 byte Al401 4 words Al41 4 words Al43 4 words AO401 4 words AIHAO 4 words AIHAO 1H 6 words AIHAO 4H 12 words AIHAO 8H 20 words AIHAT 4 words AIHAT 1H 6 words AIHAT 4H 12 words AIH41 8H 20 words AOH4
159. e the different configuration The behavior of the module is influenced by the configuration tool of the control or rather by the control system The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the 3 data bytes input status and output byte Table 29 Bit position of the data byte Bit assignment of Input byte n Ch 8 Ch 7 Ch 6 Ch 5 Ch 4 Ch 3 Ch 2 Ch 1 Status byte Ch 8 Ch 7 Ch 6 Ch 5 Ch 4 Ch 3 Ch 2 Ch 1 input byte n 1 Output byte Ch 8 Ch 7 Ch 6 Ch 5 Ch 4 Ch 3 Ch 2 Ch 1 Example 6 inputs 2 outputs Bit 0 5 in the input byte n are inputs of the channels 1 6 Bit 6 7 in the output byte are outputs of the channels 7 8 Note The status byte is assigned in the same order 70 D301266 0113 excom Digital modules Industr A Connection figures Figure 32 Terminal terminal configuration connection possibilities selectable assignment 11 BN DM80Ex Die channel 1 BU BN channel 2 k LI U i IEE n 22 channel 3 _ CX M 23 channel 4 X N R WM1 C BN s eal Coal et channel 5 BU 4 F I BN channel 6 BU z L channel 7 A nm ee s AR wo pk channel 8 AB T D301266 0113 excom 71 excom system components Parameters Note o Please take the bit assign
160. e with 8 cyclic HART variables Table 95 Input data mapping 122 Word No 1 Word 2 Bytes Content 1 Input channel 1 2 Input channel 2 3 Input channel 3 4 Input channel 4 5 6 HART Variable 1 7 8 HART Variable 2 9 10 HART Variable 3 11 12 HART Variable 4 13 14 HART Variable 5 15 16 HART Variable 6 17 18 HART Variable 7 19 20 HART Variable 8 A The HART variables are displayed in the Floating Point data format D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Industr A Note All secondary variables that were activated at parameterization are assigned to a slot in the mapped input data also when no HART compatible device is connected to the respective channels Measurement ranges Table 96 Measurement value Transmitted value Measurement value table Decimal Hexadecimal analog input 21 mA 21000 5208 20 mA 20000 4E20 4 mA 4000 OFAO 0 mA 0 0 Connection figures Figure 47 Terminal li 11 assignment AIH41Ex 12 T channel 1 Has terminal configuration connection Aux WEE channel 2 Aux channel 3 N Aux channel 4 ee EX CIC BENE T ke D301266 0113 exc
161. eale pi APERTE teer etie egeo sede eee Aere eee aaae E EERS ziduicunid E STS Gea hate rr Digital modules sepanessescsccosees 69 DMB80Ex digital I O module 8 channel Configuration and data volume Connection figures i Parameters E Channel specific module diagnosis eesssssssssecsssecsseccsscessecessccessecessscessecessccsssecsssecssuccesuecessecessceuscesscessscesssccesneceseeceneeesneecsnseests S FUNCHOMIOF the LEDS ergoen a a aa a a a a aai Technical data srn nineden iira aeien RA EEA ATA A A A R taste e A DI40Ex digital input module 4 channel Configuration and data volume Connection figures s 76 zau icunite P M a iiaa 77 Channel specific modulediagnosis osisssa iai ie ii a ia i an eea ainai iei ai ia 77 D301266 0113 excom 3 7 3 3 8 3 8 1 3 8 2 3 8 3 3 8 4 3 9 3 9 1 Industr A Function of the Es DIR OR 78 Technical data RETE Lm 79 DO401Ex digital output module 4 CHANNE csesccsseccsssecsseecssccsseccsscccsscessscesssccssuccessecessecsssecssseesseessscceseceesceesueessueessneeesnecesses 80 Valve control eecssessessessssssessesssessessesssessessesseessesaceseees 80 Load cu
162. ecognition the start delimiter of the PROFIBUS DP telegrams is evaluated Three sequential valid start delimiters must be received before the recognition process is complete All received telegrams are tested for plausability with the help of the start delimiter The baud rate recognition matches the status machine described in EN 61158 and is started after a reset 6 9 Use of GSD files GSD files describe the entire configuration volume and the communication characteristics of a PROFIBUS participant Characteristics like transmission speeds time response configruation data parameters diagnostic data etc are described in the files with code words The GSD files interpret the respective configuration software of the host systems As a rule the GSD files display the configuration and parameter data of the participants in text format A excom station can be parameterized module wise or channel wise Module wise parametrization supports simple and fast configuration and setting but is no longer supported by GSD V1 3 0 and up Channel wise parameterization supports more setting possibilities and is therefore more expensive With channel wise parameterization 4 or 5 parameter bytes are reserved for each module Table 188 Name of the GSD file Language parametrization GSD files for excom T16xFF9F GSD English per channel for the gateway GDP from FW 2 0 Default up without jokerblock support T20xFF9F GSD English per chann
163. eee eee eene e eee teens nono esee e esee seno 249 adl sisessiccceseseccsnsccessscdsoccsccccesebecccaccscacsessedescdeccbuccsctsccscesacodncesevecsucecnsesescsecadacccesesoosesssecess 20 Service and maintenance c cccccccccccccsccccccscccccscccccccccccccscccccccccccccccscccccccesccccccccsccseccccscscescccccsccecs 252 Routine IVALICE ATA CO E iaaa 252 Drm M 253 EV SAIN Gh m M 253 BICVerri e o 253 Identification of the excom components eese e eee teet eee eet eee eate e eee e ee ee eee eese ee eee e esee eee e eeu 253 excom Accessories eee e ee eee eee eee eee eee eee seo eoeeeosseessessessesseeseossoseeoseossessessesseeseessesseeseesss DOD Blind module BM1 256 Power supply unit cover BM PS sesssecceecccccccccecccecccceccccecccoccscocsccocccoccccoscccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccee 256 Ventilation d e Ir pius dts ELVA M20EXx stainless steel Terminal blocks sisisi Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU wciccccsssscsscssssscssssssssssssessssssssessssesssssssessssesssssssessssessesssssessssecsesscsacessenssecaeessenee
164. eesssccsusecssecseseecsnecesneesseees 228 Redundancy mode off eesssssscssssssssscsseccsssecsseccssecessecessecsseecsnscesnseees Redundancy mode Line Redundancy System redundancy M Parametrization of excom with system redundancy T Redundancy modus System REAUNCANCY sssssssscssssccsssecssseccessseecsnseeeesssceesnsceesssscesssscessnssecsssssessnscessseccesssseesnseecensseessnseeeese Redundancy Monitoring A 231 D301266 0113 excom 6 6 1 6 6 2 6 7 6 7 1 6 7 2 6 7 3 6 7 4 6 7 5 6 7 6 6 7 7 6 7 8 6 7 9 6 7 10 6 10 6 10 1 6 10 2 6 11 6 11 1 6 11 2 6 12 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 7 1 4 7 2 8 2 8 3 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 Industr A Input word for the current status of the gateways csssccssssscssssscesssscesseseesnseecesssccesnseeessseessnssseesnscesssseesssssscesnseecessseessnseeeesee 231 Output word for forcing a redundancy switch eter eeen tenente nnt nnn tte notte no ttts nete nnns tts toties nnns 232 Diagnoses per EN 61158 233 Principle of the diagnostic messages Structure of the diagnostic telegram Status diagnosis eerte Structure status H mactliirie ioicii rrt iter tercer ebrio ec ivi keen ciere e este kennt cer skr E rng Identification specific diagnosis e e teen tennt teen ttn ttt nntt t
165. el Parameter Bit15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BitO Status MSB SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA Status MSB SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 10000 equates to 0 to 10 V Status LSB Bit position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA SB Status LSB Bit position of the measurement value 0 10000 equates to 0 to 10 V SB without Bit position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA status without Bit position of the measurement value 0 10000 equates to 0 to 10 V status SB Status Bit settable via the gateway parameters n 1 2 3or4 Depending on the chosen gateway parameter the status bit is integrated into the process value left aligned right aligned or it is left out The resolution of the measurement value is different depending on the module the display of the raw value on the PROFIBUS is always the same 0 21 mA equal 0 21000 0 10 5 V equal 0 10500 D301266 0113 excom Configuration of a station Industr A Use of HART variables Analog modules with integrated HART controller can also integrate HART variables of the field devices into the cyclic PROFIBUS communication e g response of position regulators HART variables are floating point type variables thus they use 4 byte Invalid values are called Not A Number Their hexadecimal value is 7F AO 00 00 I
166. el for the gateway GDP from FW 2 0 Default up PNO redundancy support T16xFF9F GSG German per channel for the gateway GDP from FW 2 0 up without jokerblock support T20xFF9F GSG German per channel for the gateway GDP from FW 2 0 up PNO redundancy support D301266 0113 excom 245 excom Start up 6 10 Data formats with excom The PROFIBUS is primarily byte oriented I O modules can be configured in a way that allows processing of bytes or words With excom the values of the digital modules are organized by bytes the values of the analog moduels are organized by words 6 10 1 Data formats of the digital modules With the digital modules each channel has 1 bit in a data byte Channel 1 is mapped to Bit 0 Channel 2 to Bit 1 etc In addition the module can be configured with the status information Here 1 input bit is assigned to a channel status The following tables show information mapping Example Table 189 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Example Status Channel 1 4 Data data Data data Channel Channel Channel Channel 4 3 2 1 6 10 2 Data formats of the analog modules The analog modules have 2 data bytes Next to the measurement value the analog input modules can send a status bit that is set in case of an error Table 190 Measurement value display 246 Bit position of the input word of the n th chann
167. ellow Internal communication ok red No communication via the backplane bus PDP blinking Invalid PROFIBUS DP address 000 yellow red No data exchange with PROFIBUS DP master yellow Data exchange with PROFIBUS DP master PRIO off Gateway is passive redundancy status 7 7 yellow Gateway is active Config off Configuration ok blinking red Configuration error missing or wrongly plugged modules D301266 0113 excom Gateway GDP IS head station Industr A Special error scenarios with corresponding LED displays Table 15 LED Behavior Possible source of error PROFIBUS Error status green no communication with PROFIBUS excom address wrong CAN yellow double assignment to PROFIBUS participants PDP red no bus termination defective cabling PRIO yellow redundancy status Config off Table 16 LED Behavior Possible source of error No internal communication status green no internal communication no modules plugged CAN red module does not interfere with the internal PDP yellow communication bus PRIO yellow redundancy status Config blinking red Table 17 LED Behavior Possible source of error Configuration error status green no modules plugged module in wrong position CAN yellow modules are not correctly plugged into the rack PDP yellow modules are not parameterized PRIO yellow redundancy status Config blink
168. ent Table 136 Channel LED Meaning DF20ExF meaning of the 1 INA LEDs 2 DIRA 3 DIR_OUTA 4 ZERO f 0 1 Hz Channel A 5 IN B 6 DIR B 7 DIR OUT B 8 ZERO f 0 1 Hz Channel B D301266 0113 excom 159 excom system components Parameters As with other excom modules channel specific here function specific parameterization is possible The module DF20Ex does not have physical channels but function blocks The two available function blocks are marked with A and B in the following the corresponding signal wires with A1 A2 A3 and A4 as well as B1 B2 B3 and B4 Note o Please take the bit assignment DF20Ex F page 290 Table 137 Parameter for DF20Ex F 160 Parameter name Value Meaning A1 A4 Line on Line monitoring is activated or deactivated monitoring off A Substitute value Min value Min value The input value of the respective input Max value function block takes the value 0 last valid value Max value The input value of the respective function block takes the value 1 last valid value The input value of the respective funciton block remains at the last valid value A Substitute value output Min value Max value last valid value Min value The output value of the respective function block takes the value 0 Max value The output value of the respective function block takes the value 1 last valid value The output value of
169. ent meets the PROFIBUS DP standard Figure 12 54321 SUB D female 5 connector ee oeoo e 0o o o 9876 Table 7 Pole No RS485 IS Meaning Assignment of the SUB D pole 1 n C 2 n C 3 RxD TxD P Received data send data for B cable red 4 n C 5 ISGND Bus termination GND 6 ISP Bus termination VP 7 n C 8 RxD TxD N Received data send data for A cable green 9 n C D301266 0113 excom 37 excom system components 3 3 Supply of the excom system 3 3 1 General information The power supply is connected via Ex e terminals on the module rack Power supply units or power supply modules that are plugged into designated slots on the module rack provide the voltage supply specifically designed for the excom system and guarantee galvanic separation up to 60 V 3 3 2 Power supply units or power supply module types One power supply unit or power supply module is sufficient for the correct operation of the excom system Redundant power supply units or power supply modules increase availability Note o In the planning phase the respective nominal capacities of the modules must be added together and compared to the nominal capacity of the power supply unit power supply module Normally the supplied load is sufficient for any combined I O module per station As an exception this means if the load of the power supply unit power supply module is not sufficient the possib
170. er supply unit e cover BM PS 4x M4 145 155 E Attention Possible damage to device caused by intruding foreign objects Empty slots for power supply units or AC DC converters must always be covered with an IP20 cover 256 D301266 0113 excom Ventilation bolt Industr A 8 3 Ventilation bolt Especially inside enclosures that are installed in the field there will be condensation because of existing temperature differences inside outside This may negatively impact functionality corrosion short circuits The ventilation bolts allow good ventilation and therefore help prevent condensation In addition and in extreme cases the condensation water collected at he bottom of the housing may drain off A labyrinth design ensures that water cannot penetrate while ventilation takes place 8 3 1 ELST M20Ex plastic Figure 106 Ventilation bolt ELST M20Ex 8 3 2 ELVA M20Ex stainless steel Figure 107 Ventilation bolt ELVA M20Ex Attention Possible damage to device when the ventilation bolt is not used The ventilation bolt ELVA M20Ex must be used in areas with dust It meets the requirements of protection class IP65 and above D301266 0113 excom 257 excom Accessories 8 3 3 Terminal blocks Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU Set with 16 pieces 4 pole terminal block screw terminals blue Figure 108 Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU Set with 16 pieces 4
171. euerezodajupxcic Technical data PSM24 3G ees AC DC converter PPSA230Ex or rather PPSA115Ex Redundancy of PPSA230Ex or rather PPSA115Ex ie Technical data PPSA230EX PPSAY 15EX sissioni nRa i a Supply CONCEDES AEEA c eee irt e a pa A TO EE E 24 VDC supply redundant RR 115 230 VAC supply optionally redundant oo cssscsssscssseccsseccsssecsccsssccssscceseccsssecsusecsssecsnsecsnscesseessseesneesssesessessnsessnsessnseeane Use of the power supply unit cover BM PS sessssssccssecssssccsssccsscessccsssccsscessuccesuscesuscessecsssccsnscessccesusesssnecsssesssnecessesessesessecessessaes Certified system enclosures 49 General informat 49 TYPE CO dein 50 Mounting instructions for the system enclosures ssssessccsseccssssecssssecessseeessssecessseecssseecssusecesnscesesuseesseessssssesssssessssssesssseesssseesss 51 Ambient conditions during the installation essere nnne ttes tits ttt ttts ttti tstt ists tte ts tiis snns Completion of the temperatue test cccsssessessseessesssesssesssesssesssesssesssessscssnecssecsnecsscsssecssccsscssscesseecscesseeesccnseesnecsseesneceseesseeses Technical data for the system enclosures Accessories for the system enclosures Ventila
172. existing installations with redundant bus coupling it must be ensured that both gateways have the same hardware and firmware Connection to higher level systems For PROFIBUS DP connection either fiber optic or copper cables can be used When using fiber optic cables select a respective converter from fiber optic cable to RS485 IS The coupler system Segment coupler OC11Ex page 182 converts the RS485 IS signals to intrinsically safe fiber optic cable signals With copper cables use a respective segment coupler RS 485 IS coupler for example Segment coupler SC12Ex page 175 to guarantee Ex protection The gateway can be operated with a max transmission speed of up to 1500 kBaud The module rack has a standard SUB D connector for bus connection excom can be connected with the interface to the PROFIBUS DP per IEC 61158 to each host system that contains a PROFIBUS DP master Class 1 With the help of the PROFIBUS DP standards it is guaranteed that the configuration the parameterization the diagnostic messages as well as the cyclic data exchange are processed between Master and excom For processing the acyclic services on the PROFIBUS DP the DPV1 expansions in excom are implemented With the help of GSD files all required behaviors for excom are defined on the PROFIBUS DP In addition the configurations and parameters of the individual modules are stored here For the configuration of excom the GSD files must be made part of
173. face that has received valid telegrams sends these to the standard PROFIBUS DP interface and then on to the master D301266 0113 excom 177 excom bus components 4 2 7 LED displays The coupler has two operating LEDs for the two voltage feeds three status LEDs for the three PROFIBUS DP segments and one status LED for automatic baud rate recognition Table 148 PS1 PS2 24 VDC Statement meaning LEDs for supply green Input voltage ok voltage off Input voltage too low Table 149 RS485 RS485 IS 2x Statement meaning LEDs for red Invalid data communication PROFIBUS DP interface yellow Receipt of valid data off No data communication Table 150 Baud rate Statement meaning LEDs for baud constantly yellow Baud rate recognized rate recognition blinking yellow Baud rate recognition active setting of baud 7 7 rate off Baud rate setting via rotary switch 178 D301266 0113 excom Segment coupler SC 12Ex Industr A 4 2 8 Increasing system stability via redundancy connections with SC12bEx The following circuits Version 1 Version 2 and Version 3 increase the stability with the help of redundant control transmission paths and gateways Version 1 with line redundancy and gateway redundancy provides gateway and line redundancy With Version 2 with line redundancy and gateway redundancy with two segment couplers next to gateway and line redundan
174. facturer b electrical characteristic values that are determined via measurement with a sample according to the procedure described in Addendum G for measuring characteristic values of cables c where conventionally assembled 2 or 3 wire cables with or without shield are used for the connection 200 pF m and either 1 uH m or an inductance resistance ratio L R calculated by dividing 1 uH m by the loop resistance per meter determined by the manufacturer For systems with currents up to l 3A a L R ratio of 30 uH O can be used as an alternative Scenario a and scenario b correlate to the comparison with the real known cable values Lo WHJ _ Lc uH e g Ro EE gt Rc eos nF nF Co 250 0 7 gt Cc 28 5 lien Scenario c are the replacement values for a any PROFIBUS cable with the following values Le 1pgHx 1000 m xkm e g Loa a 9 09 Rc mxkmx110Q Q Le 19H x 1000 m x km or rather lt moO waa Rc m x km x 100 Q 200 PF 200 2E C 200 P 200 D301266 0113 excom 215 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area 216 And then results in the following evaluation Lo HH Lc uH e g E 15 0 5 a ae teo nF nF C 250 0 2 gt C 200 2 9 c gt c lien All three procedures are possible and permissible The examinations only differ in regard to the effort that is needed for the real evaluation The easiest evaluation is the result of taking
175. file GSD It is used as ID for each PROFIBUS DP component The GSD is an electronic datasheet text file provided by the device manufacturer to describe the device characteristics for cyclic PROFIBUS DP communication D301266 0113 excom Setting of PROFIBUS DP address Industr A 6 2 Setting of PROFIBUS DP address In a PROFIBUS DP network a participant here excom station is identified via a bus address E Addresses 01 to 99 99 participants for MT16 3G or rather MT24 3G may be assigned Addresses 001 to 125 125 participants can be assigned for MT16 2G Bus addresses 00 000 126 and 127 must not be used Setting of the PROFIBUS DP address is done via rotary switches on the module rack The switches depict the digits of the network address For example the following figure shows the setting of the network address 05 or rather 005 Figure 96 MT16 3G MT24 3G MT16 2G setting of network address DETA 05 or rather 005 100th digit D Co Qo M56 10th digit 1st digit 10th digit O y Co 0 5 M5 M5 ty en ty Z T m P a aa to 1st digit A Co 206 496 coo 6 2 1 Assignment of internal module address The modules are slot addressed Thus individual modules do not require adjustments Therefore a module in the slot 0 automatically has the internal address 0 a module in the slot 1 has the internal address 1 etc Note Slot 0 of module rack MT16 MT24
176. g input module AI401Ex 86 0 The analog input module Al401Ex connects 2 wire transducers active input feeding transducer passive or 4 wire transducers passive input not feeding transducer active The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus is suitable for use in excom Zone 1 applications The ignition protection class of the inputs is Ex ia IIC Note The inputs are galvanically isolated from each other The behavior of the inputs is parameterized via the PROFIBUS DP master Possible parameters are subsitute value strategy connection type measuring range and input delay The resolution is 14 bit which means the analog value of 0 21 mA is digitalized as a number between 0 and 16383 For simple presentation the digitalized value is expanded from 0 21000 and sent to the host system HART Ability HART able actuators can be connected to the module Thus parameterization can be done with an approved modem directly at the connection level on the module rack HART ability means it is possible to directly connect to the terminals of the transmitter via a FSK modem The respective burden is integrated in the module Configuration and data volume The AI401Ex operates as a true input card with additional status bit for each channel When a status message is pending the status bit of the respective channel is set to 1 in the input word depending on the display in Bit 15 or Bit O The
177. ge has been switched off and after a waiting period of 5 minutes Operation of the system is only allowed with closed cover Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock Before the auxiliary power supply is switched on the user must check and ensure the compatibility of auxiliary power supply voltage and approved power supply unit or power supply module voltage The distance of the AC supply to the wall of the enclosure must exceed 5 mm air distance and 8 mm creep distance The installation room for connecting the conductors must have a free space of 20 mm on the side D301266 0113 excom Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area Industr A 5 4 6 Equipotential bonding and shielding of the field current circuits excom meets the requirements for electromagnetic compatibility in industrial applications The CE Mark documents the correlation to the respective guidelines of the EG Conformity Declaration excom continues to meet the requirements of the NAMUR recommendations NE 21 Along all installation components equipotential bonding must exist per EN 60079 14 From the manufacturer side the excom module rack and the stainless steel enclosure are electrically connected via a equipotential bonding bridge and part of the equipotential bonding system In each case the excom module rack with a wire diameter of min 4 mm must be connected to the equipotential bonding system When shielded fiel
178. ged accordingly for display The following table shows a raw value display for the function block A Table 134 Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Raw value display 1 Valence 2 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 Block A Meaning S 0 VZ Measurement value 2 Valence 223 222 2 220 219 218 2 216 Meaning Measurement value 3 Valence 2 a aM 7 2 2 2 Fu Meaning Measurement value 4 Valence d 2 2 a 2 2 2 2 Meaning Measurement value E S measurement value status 0 valid measurement value 1 invalid measurement value E VZ prefix 0 Measurement value positive 1 Measurement value negative Note o The display can also be used for funciton block B In this case bytes 5 to 8 are assigned D301266 0113 excom 157 excom system components Input and determination of rotating direction In addition to the measurement input there is an input to determine the rotating direction Depending on parameterization via the host system the determination of the rotating direction is evaluated statically or dynamically When the rotating direction is determined dynamically the max measurement frequency is 1 25 kHz Static evaluation When the input signal is evaluated statically the logic 0 means forward direction and the logic 1 backward direction display as negative frequency Dynamic evaluation With dynamic evaluation the determination of the rotating direction is do
179. gth 1 5 mm Surface polished 240th grain size Sealing material Acrylic silicone rubber Revision opening ESG saftey glass with seal Protection class IEC EN 60529 IP54 Shock resistance EN 50014 gt 7 joule Vibration test per IEC 60068 2 6 Shock test per IEC 60068 2 27 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Flange connection plate hole pattern Stainless steel 2 0 mm with drilling holes and factory mounted cable glands 52 D301266 0113 excom Certified system enclosures Industr A 3 4 4 Accessories for the system enclosures Figure 25 Ventilation bolt ELST M20Ex Ventilation bolt Especially inside enclosures that are installed in the field there will be condensation because of existing temperature differences inside outside This may negatively impact functionality corrosion short circuits The ventilation bolts allow good ventilation and therefore help prevent condensation In addition and in extreme cases the condensation water collected at the bottom of the housing may drain off A labyrinth design ensures that water cannot penetrate while ventilation takes place ELST M20Ex plastic design ELVA M20Ex stainless steel Figure 26 Ventilation bolt ELVA M20Ex Attention Possible damage to device when the ventilation bolt is not used The ventilation bolt ELVA M20Ex must be used in areas with dust It meets
180. h the module rack MT16 All I O modules can be hot swapped without power needing to be switched off for example to replace defective modules There is an automatic check whether the new module matches the configuration The existing data communication is not interrupted The modules are equipped with LEDs for on site error analysis Each I O module has LEDs for direct diagnosis and status display of the I Os All displays meet NAMUR NE 44 or rather DIN EN 60073 which means green ready for operation E red error E yellow switch status of binary I Os The internal cycle time for a fully expanded system is below E 5ms for MT16 10 ms for MT24 with purely binary processing 20 ms for MT16 40 ms for MT24 with analog signals The response time also depends on the used PCS and the used fieldbus The connection of HART compatible field devices is supported Continuous HART communication to the PCS is possible via the PROFIBUS DPV1 A excom DTM Device Type Manager is used for configuration and parameterization in an engineering tool In stand alone tools like PACTware the DTM is used for start up and monitoring The DTM is based on the FDT specification 1 2 The parameterization of substitute values is supported by the excom system and generally occurs per chanel Depending on module type the individually requested behavior of the periphery can be adjusted for the purpose of the application D30126
181. he Ex area and Non Ex area Industr A Prior to each start up or after changing device interconnectivity please ensure that the respective instructions regulations and basic conditions are met also ensure proper operation and adherence to safety requirements Installation and connection of the device must be done by trained and qualified personnel with knowledge of respective national and international standards for Ex protection Connection of the power supply The power supply must only be connected to the respective terminals that can be found under a cover with IP30 protection class Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock The terminal cover must only be opened when no current is present With installation in the Ex range the supply cable must only be disconnected after the voltage has been switched off This restriction is not valid for installation in the safe range The terminal cover must be safely tightened after all connection work has been completed Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock The system must only be operated after the terminals have been properly covered Connection of the cables All cables must be layed through the Ex e cable glands in the system enclosure the cables must also be insulated depending on their intended lengths Only firmly layed cables must be led through the screwed cable joints The cables must be connected according to the termin
182. ice supplies the entire system Different potentials can be used for the supply Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock No work must be done on the Ex e terminals under voltage The terminals are mounted under a protective cover Interference must only occur when the respective supply voltage has been switched off The converters must not be replaced under voltage 44 D301266 0113 excom Supply of the excom system Technical data PPSA230Ex PPSA115Ex Industr A Table 11 Technical data PPSA230Ex PPSA115Ex Type code PPSA230Ex PPSA115Ex Input voltage 200 250 VAC 100 125 VAC Input power lt 75 VA Output power lt 66 5 W Ex approval PTB 04 ATEX 2047 Marking Il 2 G Ex e m IIC T4 Rated voltage U m 250 V General information Protection class IP50 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity lt 95 at 55 C per EN 60068 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 Mounting Flange 4 x M4 screws Torx Dimensions B x H x T mm 45 x 155 x 106 D301266 0113 excom 45 excom system components 3 3 7 Supply concepts 24 VDC supply redundant The following components are needed Module rack MT16 2G with E 2x Power supply unit PSD24Ex
183. ies 1 x MT16 module rack Designs of the stainless steel Version 1 Drill holes for cable screws inclusive screws enclosures Enclosure with flange plate M16 4 x M20 for voltage supply Ex e II black inclusive screws clamping ability 6 13 mm EG VA 6555 4 x M16 for bus cable Ex e II blue clamping ability 4 9 mm 1x M20 for climate bolt 84 x M16 for signal cable Ex e II blue clamping ability 4 9 mm Version 2 Drill holes for cable screws inclusive screws Enclosure with flange plate M20 4 x M20 for voltage supply Ex e II black inclusive screws clamping ability 6 13 mm EG VA 6555 4x M20 for bus cable Ex e II blue clamping ability 6 13 mm 1 x M20 for climate bolt 84 x M20 for signal cables Ex e II blue clamping ability 6 13 mm Note The Ex e and Ex i circuits must be layed according to regulations and instructions Please observe the guidelines for cables that cross inside the enclosure D301266 0113 excom 205 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area Dimensional drawing to EG VA 6555 Figure 82 EG VA 6555 View into enclosure from the bottom 260 194 19 ry 205 610 Figure 83 EG VA 6555 Topview without door F 706 I 650 o TY 81 le
184. ility exists that the redundant power supply unit power supply module is used to supply the missing load Carefully check whether the redundancy of the supply is needed or not The type of the module rack module sub rack determines the possibilities for the supply of the station Table 8 Moduleracks and suitable power supply units power supply modules 38 Module rack MT16 2G Module rack MT16 3G MT24 3G Converter sub rack MT PPS Power supply unit PSD24Ex with supply connection 19 5 32 VDC Power supply unit PSM24 3G with supply connection 19 5 32 VDC AC DC converter PPSA230Ex with supply connection 230 VAC supply voltage or PPSA115Ex with supply connection 115 VAC supply voltage The power supply units or power supply modules are downstream Redundancy possible Redundancy possible Redundancy possible 2 power supply unit slots 2 power supply module slots 2 AC DC converter slots D301266 0113 excom Supply of the excom system Industr A 3 3 3 connection of the supply voltage via Ex e connection terminals To connect the supply voltage Ex e connection terminals are available on the module rack under a IP30 cover Figure 13 Cover plate over voltage supply Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock No work must be done on the Ex e connection terminals under voltage These connection terminals are positioned u
185. ill holes for cable screws inclusive screws Enclosure with flange plate M16 4 x M20 for voltage supply Ex e Il black inclusive screws clamping ability 6 13 mm EG VA 4655 4x M16 for bus cable Ex e II blue clamping ability 4 9 mm 1x M20 for climate bolt 66 x M16 for signal cable Ex e II blue clamping ability 6 13 mm Version 2 Drill holes for cable screws inclusive screws Enclosure with flange plate M20 4 x M20 for voltage supply Ex e II black inclusive screws clamping ability 6 13 mm EG VA 4655 4x M20 for bus cable Ex e II blue clamping ability 6 13 mm 1 x M20 for climate bolt 66 x M20 for signal cables Ex e Il blue clamping ability 6 13 mm Note The Ex e and Ex i circuits must be layed according to regulations and instructions Please observe the guidelines for cables that cross inside the enclosure 202 D301266 0113 excom Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area Industr A Dimensional drawing to EG VA 4655 Figure 78 EG VA 4655 View LA into enclosure from the bottom Figure 79 EG VA 4655 Topview without d ni 516 oor 460 j N t x pj E sir i U 235 550
186. inal TURCK packaging professionally installed and started up as well as operated and carefully maintained as intended and in perfect and undamaged condition 5 2 Correct operation The components of the excom system are manufactured and tested per IEC 61010 1 leaving the factory in perfect and safe condition excom is suitable for the installation in Zone 1 and Zone 2 as well as Zone 21 and Zone 22 Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by explosion Installation in Zone 0 or Zone 20 is not permitted The ignition protection class found on the components of the excom system must be observed Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by retrofitting modifications and repairs Retrofitting modifications as well as repairs on the device are not permitted Attention Possible damage to the device caused by foreign objects All foreign objects must be removed prior to the start up of the device 192 D301266 0113 excom Conformity to standards of excom Industr A 5 3 Conformity to standards of excom excom meets the requirements per EN 60079 0 EN 60079 7 EN 60079 11 and EN 60079 18 as well as EC guidelines Devices and Protective Systems for the Intended Use in Explosive Areas 94 9 EG and Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004 108 EG Note o The EC conformity declarations are found on the product inserts of the components 5 4 Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area exc
187. ing red D301266 0113 excom 57 excom system components Gateway diagnosis The gateway also provides manufacturer specific error codes next to standard diagnoses For example these are power supply unit errors or power supply module errors project planning mistakes internal communication redundancy switches etc Table 18 Special error codes of the gateway diagnosis 58 Error code No Meaning 16 ROM error 17 RAM error 18 EEPROM error 19 Starting up after a cold start 20 Different configuration with redundancy 21 Different firmware with redundancy 22 Error function of the internal bus CAN error 23 Error function of the internal bus passive CAN error 24 Error in power supply unit or power supply module 1 25 Error in power supply unit or power supply module 2 26 Starting up after Watchdog Reset 27 Redundancy switch has taken place 28 Redundant gateway is missing 29 Redundant gateway is not ready 30 Redundant gateway has an error 31 Redundant gateway has no PROFIBUS DP communication D301266 0113 excom Gateway GDP IS head station Industr A Parameters Table 19 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameters gateway power frequency 50Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz filter to suppress power supply 60 Hz caused superimposed interferences in signal cables Analog data format Status MSB The status bit of an analog inpu
188. ing start up and cyclic data exchange the slave informs the master about its status in the header It is basically 6 byte long The first 3 byte 1 3 contain status information byte 4 has the address of the assigned master Byte 5 and 6 contain the PROFIBUS identifier Byte 7 and beyond contain the expanded diagnosis Table 168 Structure of the diagnosis telegram Byte 1 6 Byte 7 15 Byte 16 19 Byte 20 Slave Diag Status diagnosis page Identification specific Channel specific 237 diagnosis page 239 diagnosis page 240 Notes Notes The status diagnosisis The identifier specific 2 bytelongerwhenslot diagnosis module 17 is used diagnosis is 1 byte longer when slot 17 is used Header The following tables show an exact specification of the individual diagnostic bytes of the header Bit assignment in byte 1 station status 1 page 234 Bit assignment in byte 2 station status 2 page 235 Bit assignment in byte 3 station status 3 page 236 Byte 4 Diag Master Add page 236 Bytes 5 and 6ldent Number page 236 D301266 0113 excom 233 excom Start up Table 169 Bit Name Meaning Bit assignment in No byte 1 station_ status 1 0 Diag Station Non Existent This bit is set by the DP master when the respective slave cannot be accessed 1 Diag Station Not Ready This bit is set by the DP slave when it is not ready for data transmission 2 Diag Cfg Fault This
189. ion unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent Function of the LEDs Table 132 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for this slot green correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data Channel off No channel error red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present D301266 0113 excom 153 excom system components Technical data Table 133 Type code TI40Ex Technical data TI41Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module internal power consumption lt 1W Inputs 4 x 2 3 4 wire resistance thermometer Input resistance thermometer Pt100 Ni100 Cu100 Cable resistance 4 wire 500 3 wire 100 2 wire lt 5Q Resolution 14 bit Short circuit lt 5Q Wire breakage 25000 Linearity error lt 0 1 96 from end value Temperature drift lt lt 0 005 K Rise time fall time lt 50 ms 10 90 Ex approval petition filed Marking 1I12 1 G Exib ia ICT4 11 1 D Ex ia IIIC Ex max values field circuits Ex ia IIC IIB Connection to passive field Connection to active device e g measurement field device e g resistances thermal elements Open cir
190. ion of the signal 3 11 4 Substitute values and validity of measurement values for DF20Ex Compared to other excom modules the DF20Ex does not directly forward all signals instead they are internally pre processed Because of this reason the substitute values of the signals are not issued as subsitute values but a derivation from the resulting function If the substitue value strategy Last Valid Value is parameterized the subsitute value of the frequency is set to Null when wire breakage or short circuit occur on the frequency input since the interference can happen at an arbitrary moment during measurement The following substitute values are generated depending on interference and parameterization Table 143 Substitute value generation D301266 0113 Interference Parameter substitute value Substitute value A of the input Wire breakage or short circuit min value 16 80 00 00 00 on A1 A4 or rather B1 B4 max value 16 4 9F FF FF FF Last valid value 16 80 00 00 00 Module pulled min value 16 80 00 00 00 max value 16 OF FF FF FF Last valid value 16 8X XX XX XX The substitute values of the output only correspond to the output of the rotating direction recognition for the case that the parameter value Host Controlled f 4kHz is set Then the output accepts the set substitute value excom 165 excom system components 3 11 5 Channel specific m
191. is possible Figure 22 Example for a system enclosure D301266 0113 excom 49 excom system components 3 4 2 Type code The available certified systems can be ordered with the help of the following type code Table 12 System enclosures Type code EG VA 655526 1 1 1 02 0 O a Meaning system enclosures Special No for accessory equipment like trace heating systems circuit breakers fuses or lightning protection components 0 no installation of segment coupler OC11 1 Installation of segment coupler OC11 2 Installation of two segment couplers OC11 0 without converter sub rack MT PPS 1 with converter sub rack MT PPS 00 no module rack 01 reserved 02 Module rack MT16 2G 03 reserved 04 reserved 05 Module rack MT16 3G 06 Module rack MT24 3G 07 reserved 08 reserved 09 Module rack MT24 N dummy plate Flange plate M16 Flange plate M20 xX N O Special design via SE No 0 no window 1 Window 0 Material 1 4301 1 Material 1 4404 WW here 65 Enclosure width in cm HH here 55 Enclosure height in cm DD here 26 Enclosure depth in cm EG VA excom enclosure Stainless steel design 50 D301266 0113 excom Certified system enclosures Industr A 3 4 3 Mounting instructions for the system enclosures The system enclosures have a perforated flange plate hole pattern For the holes ATEX approved Ex e cable screws an
192. isplay in Bit 15 or Bit O The status bit is set when an error occurs that initiates a diagnostic message The analog value of 0 21 mA is recalculated as a number in Bit 15 with 1n A Digit and sent to the host system The voltage value 0 10 V is displayed in the range 0 to 10000 for the purpose of being sent to the host Depending on the selection of the gateway parameters Analog data format page 265 the status bit is integrated into the process data left aligned right aligned or it is not integrated at all D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Industr A Table 56 Input byte Output byte Type Configuration Configuration of the Al41Ex 8 Al41Ex Input module with status The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the input word e g of the first channel Table 57 Bit position of the input word of the n th channel Bit assignment of the input word Parameter Bit15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BitO Status MSB SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA Status MSB SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 10000 equates to 0 to 10 V Status LSB Bit position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA SB Status LSB Bit position of the measurement value 0 10000 equates to 0 to 10 V SB without Bit position of the measurement value 0
193. it value has not been reached 3 6mA 1 21 mA Acceptable range 21mA 1 25 mA 7 Upper limit value exceeded 25 mA 1 Short circuit 128 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Industr A Function of the LEDs Table 104 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for this slot green correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data Channel off red No channel error Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present D301266 0113 excom 129 excom system components Technical data Table 105 Type code AIH41Ex passive Technical data AIH41Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 3W Inputs 4 analog sensors Supply voltage gt 15 0 V DC at 22 mA on transmitter Input current 0 4 20 mA per input HART impedance 2240 Overcontrol 221mA Undercontrol lt 3 6mA Short circuit lt 5V only with Live zero Wire breakage lt 2 mA only with Live zero Resolution 14 bit Linearity error lt 0 1 96 from end value Temperature drift lt 0 005 K Rise time fall time lt 50 ms 10 90 Ex approval PTB 00 ATEX 2059 X Marking 9 I12 1 G Exib ia IIC TA II 1 D
194. iting period of min 5 minutes Operation of the system is only allowed with closed cover Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock Before the auxiliary power supply is switched on the user must check and ensure the compatibility of auxiliary power supply and approved power supply unit or power supply module voltage The distance ofthe 24 VDC supply to the wall of the enclosure must exceed 5 mm air distance and 8 mm creep distance The installation room for connecting the conductors must have a free space of 20 mm on the side D301266 0113 excom Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area Industr A Connection of the power supply to the PSM24 3G All components of the power supply for the excom system must be installed according to the requirements of ignition protection class e Increased Safety per EN 60079 7 The max approved wire width is E rigid 4 mm flexible 2 5 mm The tightening torque is min 0 5 Nm and max 0 6 Nm The auxiliary power must be protected with a cable safety fuse of 10 A The regulations per der EN 60079 14 VDE 0165 Part 1 especially Chapter 11 of the standard additional requirements for ignition protection class e Increased Safety must be met The connections can be found under a IP30 cover Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock The cover must only be opened after the voltage has been switched off and af
195. ive red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present Table 141 Channel LED Meaning DF20Ex P meaning of the 1 INA LEDs 2 UP DOWN A 3 MRSA 4 RSTA 5 INB 6 UP DOWN B 7 MRS B 8 RST B D301266 0113 excom 163 excom system components Parameters As with other excom modules channel specific here function specific parameterization is possible The module DF20Ex does not have physical channels but function blocks The two available function blocks are marked with A and B in the following the corresponding signal wires with A1 A2 A3 and A4 as well as B1 B2 B3 and B4 Note o Please take the bit assignment DF20Ex P page 292 Table 142 Parameter for DF20Ex P 164 Parameter name Value Meaning A1 A4 on Line monitoring is activated or deactivated Cable monitoring off A Substitute value Min value Min value The input value of the respective input Max value function block takes the value 0 last valid value Max value The input value of the respective function block takes the value 1 last valid value The input value of the respective funciton block remains at the last valid value A Substitute value output Min value Max value last valid value Min value The output value of the respective function block takes the value 0 Max value The output value of the respective function block takes the value 1 last
196. k central power supply unit Power consumption lt 1 5W Input circuits Potentiometer intrinsically safe per EN 60079 11 4 channels Nominal resistance 400 Q 12 kQ Resolution 14 bit Linearity error lt 0 1 from end value Temperature drift lt 0 005 K Rise time fall time lt 50 ms 10 90 Ex approval PTB 06 ATEX 2026 Marking 9 I12 1GD G Ex ib ia IIC T4 Max values on the terminals 1 to 4 Max output voltage U lt 6 6 V Max output currentl lt 25 mA Max output power P 42mW Characteristic curve linear R 134 Q Max internal inductance L negligible Max internal capacity C lt 150 nF Max external inductance IIC IIB capacity Lo Co L mH C pF C uF 5 0 1 6 8 5 1 0 2 2 12 General information Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 at 55 C per EN 60069 2 Vibration and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 D301266 0113 excom 103 excom system components 3 8 4 AO4O1Ex analog output module 4 channel Table 70 analog output module AO401Ex The output module AO401Ex is used to connect intrinsically safe actuators like control valve or process displays The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus is
197. k generation is prevented This is why I O modules and gateways can be hot swapped hot plug when the excom is used in Zone 2 Here data communication is not interrupted With the help of the AC DC converters on the converter sub rack MT PPS the 230 115 VAC supply voltage is transformed to an unregulated 24 VDC supply voltage and supplied to the power supply units or power supply modules on the module rack Here an AC DC converter is connected per power supply unit or power supply module The converter sub rack has a combined protection class Ex e and Ex i and can be used in Zone 2 3 2 2 Type code Table 4 Type code module racks 28 Module rack MT 16 2G 2G Application in Zone 1 3G Application in Zone 2 16 Slots for max 2 gateways and 16 I O modules 24 Slots for max 2 gateways and 24 I O modules PPS Converter sub rack for Zone 1 MT Module rack Note o The current module rack version MT18 RO24 has the same functions as the module rack version MT16 2G and is therefore compatible D301266 0113 excom Module racks module sub racks of the excom system Industr A Three different module rack versions and one converter sub rack are available Table 5 Module rack versions and converter sub racks Module rack versions for Zone 2 MT16 3G DC supply 24 VDC max 2 power supply modules max 2 gateways 16 I O modules max 128 binary I Os max or 64 analog I Os
198. lot is passive Bit 1and Bit 0 0 1 Gateway in the right slot is active 1 0 Gateway in the left slot is passive 1 1 Gateway in the left slot is active Table 163 Gateway redundancy Bit 2 Meaning Possible status messages viathe 0 Redundant gateway is not ready input word Bit 2 1 Redundant gateway is ready Table 164 Power supply unit or power supply Meaning Possible status module status messages via the input word Left power Right power Bit 4 and Bit 3 supply unit or supply unit or power supply power supply module Bit 4 module Bit 3 0 1 Left power supply unit or power supply module failed 1 0 Right power supply unit or power supply module failed Both power supply units or power supply modules ok D301266 0113 excom 231 excom Start up 6 6 2 Output word for forcing a redundancy switch Bit 0 2 control the redundancy switch The redundancy switch only responds if Bit 0 and 1 change the status 11 gt 01 or 11 gt 10 Bit 2 controls the response to a flange switch When Bit 2 0 a redundancy switch is initiated independent from the gateway positions When Bit 2 1 the left or right gateway is purposefully activated Bit 2 can be used statically It is newly evaluated with each flange switch Table 165 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Structure of the output word Byte 0 not assigned Control Control
199. max or a combination thereof Module rack versions for Zone 1 MT16 2G DC supply 24 VDC max 2 power supply units max 2 gateways 16 I O modules max 128 binary I Os max or 64 analog I Os max or a combination thereof MT24 3G DC supply 24 VDC max 2 power supply modules max 2 gateways 24 O modules max 192 binary I Os max or 96 analog I Os max or a combination thereof Converter sub rack MT PPS AC supply 230 115 VAC max 2 AC DC converters D301266 0113 excom 29 excom system components 3 2 3 Module rack MT16 2G The following figure shows the module rack MT16 2G that is equipped with MINI COMBICON clamps for the signal connection layer Figure 3 Module rack MT16 2G LOOOOOO jOOOOOO s LO000009g o000090 Two slots for 24 VDC power supply units Ex e connection for the external power supply Bridge for possible grounding of the shield of the data cable Two 9 pole SUB D connectors for PROFIBUS RS485 IS Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP page 225 Rotary switch for setting the network address Address switch on the module rack and addressing page 36
200. ment DM80Ex DM80EX S page 266 The module has 5 parameter bytes The parameterization of the module is always done via 2 channels at a time Table 30 Parameter for DM80Ex 72 Parameter name Value Meaning Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or deactivated monitoring off with the help of channels In case of a short circuit the respective channel LED is red The output signal can only be monitored when the output is triggered Wire breakage on Wire breakage monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated with the help of channels In case of a wire breakage the respective channel LED is red The output signal can only be monitored when the output is triggered Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set for last valid value each channel Effective direction Input Input The channels of the module are switched in Output groups as inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The versions DM80 S and DM80 S8I provide a status Output The channels of the module are switched in groups as outputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No status information is issued The version DM80 S also provides a status for the outputs Polarity normal Activation or deactivation of the signal inversion inverted De chattering off For de chattering mechanical contacts an 10 ms additional dampening of the input signals
201. modules ccecce 109 AIHAOEx analog input module 4 channel eee eeen teen tenent teen etes eettttts ttt tte nk ttts stitit ttis astns 109 Configuration and data volume sscssecsssecsssecsseecsssscnscesseeesssecsssecsucccsuccssuscessecsssecsnscessscensscessceessuesssnecsssesessessnsesaneessnseeansessneees 109 Error message via the status bit of the data telegram eerte tenente sett ttttnt tensis siste 110 Floating point format of the HART variable Mapping of the input data sss Measurement range sssseseeeeerettnnes Connection figures eerte Eric SuBstitue EIU Ecce Channel specific module diagnosis ou sesssssseecsssescessscecssssccessssecssssecessnccessssecessncessnscecsnseseesuneessesssseessssssesssuessssssesssssssssnsenss Function OF the EDS e IC ur ze D301266 0113 excom 7 3 9 2 3 9 3 3 10 3 10 1 3 10 2 3 11 3 11 1 3 11 2 3 11 3 AIH41Ex analog input module 4 channel csesscsesccsssccsseecsseccesccesscccssccsssccesuccessccessccessecsssecsssecsscesusecsuecsanecesuecesseceseeesnseestees 120 Configuration and data volume seasainn iA EE teen tenentes tte notte n
202. n Line redundancy hardware page 226 6 4 1 Parametrization of excom with line redundancy The redundancy for excom is set via the gateway parameter Redundancy Mode Address Offset and Address Offset Value 6 4 2 Redundancy mode off If the parameter Redundancy Mode is deactivated off excom operates with line reduncancy without monitoring If communication between the master and the primary gateway is interrupted the redundant gateway of the excom station controls the communication gateway redundancy Note o When switching occurs the communication compatibility of the redundant gateway is not tested An additional diagnosis is generated Figure 101 Properties DP slave E Redundancy Address D Parameter Assignment parameters Value Ekt Station parameters EH Device specific parameters HE grid frequency 50Hz 2 analog data Format status MSB backplane MT18 16 I O modules amp redundancy mode off power supply single cyclic data select 0 LIE HCIR active off HIE HCIR WCBC factor base x 1 LE HCIR WCBC base x 100ms 5 H address offset disable HIE address offset value o HEJ can redundancy on LIE sF2 select 0 LE sr3 select 0 Ste Hex parameter assignment L uU LJE User Prm Data 0 to 3 C1 00 00 05 Cancel Hen 228 D301266 0113 excom Line redundancy Industr A
203. n n n 5 5 Instructions concerning the explosion protection certificates This section mainly addresses the persons responsible for explosion protection and contains information to understand and combine the existing EC type examination certificates Information for the evaluation of the U certificates The excom system has for each module as well as module carriers and enclosures a respective EC type examination certificate for explosion protection The plant operator does not have any disadvantages because of this concept because this was taken into consideration by the testing laboratory and the certifications correspond to each other In contrast to certification for modules the module carriers have U certification which is issued for incomplete operating equipment Thus so called Ex components are defined per EN 60079 0 These are electrical operating devices that must not by themselves be used in explosive areas and that require an additional certification when being installed into electrical equipment The certification for the module rack PTB 00 ATEX 2194 U contains a description in the first paragraph of Section 15 for the exclusive use of the module rack in the excom system In the individual certificates of the modules Section 15 describes each module as a component of the excom system and expressly makes it part of the module rack certificate There is no requirement for the issue of a second document
204. nder a protective cover Interference must only occur when the respective supply voltage has been switched off When the power supply unit filter PS F24 Ex is used a waiting period of 5 min must be observed Note e The cover can only be opened when the power supply units or AC DC converters have been pulled from the slots D301266 0113 excom 39 excom system components 3 3 4 Power supply unit PSD24Ex Power supply unit for 24 VDC feed Application in Zone 1 possible Figure 14 PSD24Ex 40 The power supply unit PSD24Ex supplies the excom system up to full expansion The power supply unit is designed for a combined protection class Ex m Ex e and Ex i and can be used in Zone 1 The power supply unit is fully potted and housed in an aluminum protective enclosure The PSD24Ex has a 19 5 32 VDC supply voltage The external supply is connected via Ex e terminals on the module rack Redundancy of PSD24Ex In combination with the module rack MT16 2G two power supply units can be used When one device fails or when the supply line is interrupted the other device supplies the entire system Different potentials can be used for the supply Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock No work must be done on the Ex e terminals under voltage The terminals are mounted under a protective cover Interference must only occur when the respective supply voltage has been switched off
205. ne via the phase position between the measurement input and the output for determining the rotating direction The following drawing explains the principle Figure 56 Dynamic determination of rotating direction IN advanced IN 2 p DIR xu de toh Figure 57 Dynamic determination of rotating direction IN Lx r DIR oT L IN lagging pil tph In addition determination of the rotating direction can be preset by the host system Here the input DIR is inactive The control byte of the DF20Ex F is assigned as follows Figure 58 Bit 7 6 3 1 0 Output byte 1 of the DF20ExF for Meaning Up down function block A 158 Output byte with analog structure controls function block B E up down 0 positive frequency E up down 1 negative frequency D301266 0113 excom Frequency counter module Industr A Function of the LEDs Table 135 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for this slot green Correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data green blinking fast The master is not in the data_exchange after configuration Channel off Channel not active not set yellow Channel switched active red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis pres
206. nect 2 wire transmitters galvanically isolated AI41Ex 4 channel binary input module to connect 4 wire transmitters galvanically isolated Al43Ex 4 channel analog input module to connect potentiometers with 3 wire or 4 wire technology AO401Ex 4 channel analog output module to connect analog actuators galvanically isolated AIH40Ex 4 channel analog input module to connect 2 wire transmitters with HART functionality AIH41Ex 4 channel analog input module to connect 4 wire transmitters with HART functionality AOHAOEx 4 channel analog output module to connect analog actuators with HART functionality TI40Ex 4 channel analog input module to connect thermo couples temperature resistors and thermo elements TI41Ex 4 channel analog input module to connect temperature resistor couples Pt100 Ni100 and Cu100 DF20Ex 2 channel input module to count impulses or to measure the frequency of binary impulse sequences D301266 0113 excom 21 Introduction of the excom system Table 3 Components of the excom system couplers 22 PROFIBUS DP coupler versions SC12Ex OC11Ex 2G 2 and OC11Ex 3G 2 Coupling via copper cables Ex separation between RS485 and RS485 IS Regeneration of amplitude and phase LWL coupler Ex separation between RS485 and RS485 IS with the help of LWL coupler Regeneration of amplitude and phase Transmission over long dist
207. nector type D9T RSA485IS The gateway redundancy is a simple redundancy function of the excom system which is not parameterized or visible in the master The switch is done independently by the gateways D301266 0113 excom 225 excom Start up 6 3 2 Line redundancy hardware Line redundancy increases the availability with the least time and effort Line redundancy can only be realized with an active master A second redundant master can be installed for hot stand bys With line redundancy the bus line is divided into two redundant bus lines next to the master This is realized by using two segment couplers or one SC12Ex For this purpose the excom station must have two gateways Each gateway will be coupled to one of the two redundanct bus lines One of the two gateways is switched active the other one is in stand by Note o When replacing a defective gateway please note that the new device must have the same firmware and hardware revisions as the redundant gateway The correct setting of the parameters for the following hardware connection can be found in Parametrization of excom with line redundancy page 228 Figure 99 Line redundancy 226 Host Redundancy connection Host reserve Master PROFIBUS DP Master RS485 SC12Ex PROFIBUS DP RS485 IS Line redundancy is pa
208. nente ennnn tnnt enn tttenn tette ttttennsten 172 Repeater functionality of the segment coupler ssessccssssecssssecesseccsnseecssssseessseecsnssscessscessnseeeessscessnseessseecsnssscesnseeeensseeesnssseeste 173 Segment coupler MM 175 General information about SC12 Ex eterne tenentes ttte nitet no ttttsnistts sett it titii tte sitis ette ttti se ittts sanis System design with the SC1QEX csssscssssscseccsssccssecssssccseecsssecsssecsssccssscessscessecesecessceesneccsnccesnessesesseesssesssuccessssessessnsessnsassnsassneasaues Redundant interface and supply voltage on the SC12Ex Male connector and bus termination on the SC12EXx Baud rate setting via the rotary switch on the SCT12Ex serene Converting the RS485 signal into the RS485 IS Ex i signal with the SC 2Ex eere teen tnnt 177 LED display A 178 Increasing system stability via redundancy connections with SCT12Ex eee tttenttetntttennnits 179 technical data of the SCV Plo d 181 Segment coupler General information about OC11Ex Additional characteristics P System design with OCT VES 5 aatem ttn hers SOR er n n RAAE 184 Male connector and bus termination on the OCT1EX steer tette ttn ttt ntis ttt notet nin tts notis 184 Setting the baud
209. nformation from the slave until this bit is reset The DP slave sets this bit for example if it is unable to send valid user data 2 This bit is set to 1 by the DP slave 3 Diag WD On Watchdog on This bit is set by the DP slave as soon as Watchdog monitoring is activated 4 Diag Freeze Mode This bit is set by the DP slave as soon as it has received the command Freeze Control 5 Diag Sync Mode This bit is set by the DP slave when it receives the command Sync 6 reserved 0 7 Diag deactivated This bit is set by the DP master when the DP slave was identified as inactive in the slave parameter set and when it no longer participates in cyclic data transmission This bit is always reset to 0 by the DP slave A If Bit 1 and BitOare set Bit 0 has the higher priority D301266 0113 excom 235 excom Start up Table 171 Bit Name Meaning Bitassignmentin No byte 3 station_ status_3 0 6 reserved 7 Diag Ext_Diag_ If this bit is set more diagnostic information is present Overflow than approved Ext_Diag_Data The DP slave sets this bit for example when the sum of the upcoming channel diagnoses exceeds the send buffer of the slaves Table 172 Name Meaning Byte 4 Diag Master Diag Master_Add This byte receives the address of the master that Add parameterized the slave If no master in the network parameterized the slave
210. ng mP 3iuaedsus c 219 excom Start up ecce e eee ee eee eee eese oe o esee sees esses eessse sesso ee osseeeeseeeeeoseseosseeesseseoseseeeeseseeeseseessse 2 2 Characteristics of the PROFIBUS DP LLee eee e eene eene e eene ee ee eee eee tn sonne e eaae setae eee en osos eee es eee eee enses ose eaae ee 222 Setting of PROFIBUS DP address eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee eese eese ee esee e esee eese esses senses sees osse osse Posee osse ssssse 223 Assignment of internal module address eterne ttte nettes ntes ttttii ttti nstte stie ssistte sette sisti 223 Access to the l O addresses eet tte ritenere rentre trees etse etu eee desk tnr esta saepe ote oaen 223 Connection Of PROFIBUS DP ttt te hte eetest eb ied e tvs eR ete ege E aasa NES aasa 224 Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP 4 e ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee e eee ee eee eee eee eee eee e eese eee e eee se e eene 225 Gateway redundancy s e eae Reddite RA Re Rete RE de etti eee REA ERR ANDE Reo etes eth ee Line redundancy hardware sssssscssssccssssecssssccssseecssssecssssecessssecssssesessnscesssseessnsesssnssessnssecsssseessssssssssssesssssesss Systemredundancy hardware Lime redundancy 228 Parametrization of excom with line redUNGANCY sssccsssscsssscssseecsecssscccssccsssccsssccesuecessecessccssscessseesut
211. nside of a module access to random HART variables with different channels is freely selectable Depending on module configuration the following parameter values may be selected Primary Primary variable represents the measurement value 4 20 mA Secondary Secondary variable SV SV1 first auxiliary variable generally the process value SV2 second auxiliary variable device specific SV3 third auxiliary variable device specific SV4 fourth auxiliary variable device specific HART variables are basically queued into the cyclic data behind the analog values of the module Depending on access to the HART variables different channels are chosen inside a module The sequence is ascending starting with Channel 1 SV1 and ending with Channel 4 SV4 In case more variables should be selected with GSD based configuration than what the configuration of the module prescribes only the first variables according to the above sequence are transmitted Note No information will be provided in regards to implausible parameterization 6 11 Configuration of a station 6 11 1 Configuration of the gateway Depending on the configuration in the network configurator of the control software the gateway GDP can be equipped with additional functions These additional functions are identified by adding C to the product name GDP C In this configuration the gateway provides an input word and an output word The input data word and th
212. nsors per EN 60947 5 6 or mechanical contacts With 8 VDC a current of 4 mA is available at the output There are one frequency input and three control inputs or rather control outputs per block The function blocks are marked with A and B in the following the corresponding signal wires with Al 4 A2 A3 and A4 as well as B1 a B2 B3 and B4 The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus can be used in connection with excom in Zone 1 The ignition protection class of the I Os is Ex ia IIC Attention Possible damage to the device caused by wrong connection When connecting the field devices it must be taken into consideration that all I Os share a common potential Count and frequency functionality The module is operated in the operating modes Counter and Frequency Input and therefore is used to count impulses or measure the frequency of binary impulse sequences Setting of the count direction direction detection reset as well as release can be done externally via a control input or internally by setting the control bit D301266 0113 excom 155 excom system components Connection diagram Figure 55 Terminal terminal configuration connection possibilities selectable assignment ll 1 i BN DF20Ex ji channel 1 INA EI N En ioe NN IN B channel 2 an A counter frequency channel 3 DIR A DIR A Co channel 4 D
213. ntegrated R C combination A bridge that short circuits the R C combination can be installed if needed delivery status is the park position of the bridge on the left mounting rack Figure 93 Shield connection on the module rack Pwr 1 Pwr 2 5 TURCK j Ex M lheim Germany 3 y cast e A Z i a D Park position of the bridge f z p Shield connection 218 D301266 0113 excom Shield for the segment coupler SC 12Ex Industr A 5 6 1 Shielding designs for RS485 IS The RS485 IS Ex i fieldbus cables must be protected from interferences with a suitable shield design that matches the overall design In any case the following requirements must be met Danger Possible injury to persons caused by explosion No prohibited equalizing currents must flow across the shield cable Two shield designs are available 1 The connections are connected to the earth potential on both sides hard grounded on both sides In order to avoid equalizing currents across the cable shield an additional equalizing cable has to be installed It must consist of a cable with a wire diameter of 2 6 mm that is layed parallel to a fieldbus cable The equipotential bonding cable must be layed between the supply and the first participant as well as between all other participants In order to keep the active shield surface small the equalizing cable must be layed as close as possible to the shielded bus cable
214. nto consideration and certified with an individual approval Completion of the temperatue test Attention Possible damage to device caused by excessive ambient temperature Please take into consideration that additional modules in a excom system cause an increase of total power which leads to a decrease of the permittable ambient temperature Please take measures to reduce the ambient temperature Please avoid direct solar radiation With direct solar radiation the ambient temperature must be reduced even more D301266 0113 excom 51 excom system components Temperature characteristic curve for enclosures EG VA655521 Figure 23 Temperature Characteristiccurve EG VA655521 TuPC 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Temperature characteristic curve for the enclosure EG VA405521 Figure 24 Temperature Characteristic curve EG VA405521 TuPC 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 15 17 5 20 22 5 25 27 5 30 32 5 35 Technical data for the system enclosures Table 13 Stainless steel System enclosure Type code EG VA Ident No upon request Ex approval per conformity declaration PTB 03 ATEX 1028 Marking ll2G Exed mb qib ia ib op is IIC T4 Enclosure material Stainless steel 1 4404 AISI 316L Material stren
215. nverts the signals of the fiber optic cable into the intrinsically safe RS485 IS data format This transmission is potential free and interference free across distances of up to 2500 m Additional characteristics Figure 70 The coupler system OC11Ex with a fiber optic cable connection L L L L L 182 The segment coupler guarantees that amplitude and phase of the signal are regenerated so that a complete network segment can be connected to the coupler With the help of an additional connection possibility two OC11Ex 3G 2 or two OC11Ex 2G 2 can be directly coupled Cable errors wire breakage short circuit are not transmitted from one segment to another Thus an interference free operation of all segments independent from each other is possible A coupler has 4 LED displays a status LED for the connected PROFIBUS DP segment a status LED for the connected LWL cable an operation LED for the voltage supply and a status LED for automatic baud rate recognition With the function Automatic Baud Rate Recognition Setting of Baud Rate the baud rate is automatically recognized when the rotary switch is positioned to O In switch position 1 to 7 the baud rate can be set permanently D301266 0113 excom Segment coupler OC 11Ex Industr A Figure 71 OC11Ex 3G 2 Frontal view 1500 00 ABA Ato TURCK OC11Ex 3G 2 m PTB 05 ATEX 2052 X M 2 G Ex ib op is N
216. o E ga tts ieoi aiie stt nettes nostis 153 Function of the LEDs eerie reete eee tn eene en eee re te ete enne nene reso 153 Technical data ttt SN obtu adult tae Meteo ERU RU et tro Lan 154 Frequency counter module eee eee e eee eene etae teet eese eese ete ee eee esee eee eee tebecesecsseccccosess 155 DF20Ex frequency module or rather counter MOCUIE 00 esssssssscessescessscecssscecessscecssscecesssecesssccesnscecessscesssessssuecssssssssssssessess 155 Count and frequency functionality on essesessseccssseecssssecssssecesnssecsssecsssnscesussesssssesssnuscesunecesssnssssssssssssssasssseessssesasssneeassseees 155 Count and frequency functionality eee ii nnt eterno E REAA ttis stis NA 155 Connection diagram Jo eee depen ede pee tee pde tit E ty RR bedient eet 156 DE20EXF frequency module 2 5 2 eae ene dte niei iius 157 Measurement INPUT sese tentenntnntenententnn 157 Input and determination of rotating direction 158 Static evaluation eterne ntt tnnt 158 Dynamic evaluation 158 Function of the LEDs 159 ER CHi te 160 DF20Ex P co ntermod le zc OR p ebrei e RR Ei ere ere iere Un europe sep Pus 161 ex COUNMTSH IPUt ssc o asatsadonssoieabscsdossbcsatusetonsbscsansvessoescontoussbasiasesdelaieseihdesuadazeastesacsoodyaucebe A dedeueesorsneas ueccebtee 161 Input to determin count direction oe eeccssecsssecsssccsseccsseccssccsssecssscsssse
217. odule diagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the DF20Ex F module supports the following channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 Table 144 Error codes 166 Error code No Meaning Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage Specific 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent Refer to the following table DF20Ex F meaning of the LEDs page 159 m DF20Ex P meaning of the LEDs page 163 D301266 0113 excom Frequency counter module 3 11 6 Technical data Industr A Table 145 Technical data DF20Ex Type code DF20Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 1W Inputs outputs 2 channels per NAMUR DIN EN 60 947 5 6 Open circuit voltage 8V DC Short circuit current 4 mA per input Switching threshold on off 1 8 mA 1 4 mA Switching frequency lt 4000 Hz Short circuit R lt 367Q Wire breakage lt 0 2 mA Ex approval PTB 00 ATEX 2178 Marking 91I 2 1GD G Ex ib ia IIC T4 Ex max values field circuits Ex ia IIC IIB Open circuit voltage
218. oeneoni ic esl D301266 0113 excom Module racks module sub racks of the excom system Industr A 3 2 4 Module rack MT16 3G The following diagram shows the module rack MT16 3G that is equipped with MINI COMBICON clamps for the signal connection layer Figure 5 A G H Module rack MT16 3G 00000 0000 0000 0000 00000 00000 00000 0000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 eG Ge 00000 Two slots for 24 VDC power supply modules Ex e connection for the external power supply under the cover Bridge for possible grounding ofthe shield of the data cable Two 9 pole SUB D connectors for PROFIBUS RS485 IS Rotary switch for setting the network address Address switch on the module rack and addressing page 36 Connection layer for the Ex i field devices MINI COMBICON Slots for two gateways Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP page 225 Slots for max 16 I O modules Grounding bolt
219. of EN 60079 11 for separation distances is used and this is why the requirement to decrease to contamination level 2 must be observed This is also valid when the system is installed in the safe area Here the same requirements are valid in regard to leak tightness impact protection etc as those for an approved enclosure The enclosure must meet all valid inspection requirements for enclosures which are stipulated in EN 60079 0 for protection class IP54 Inspections must be verified in an acceptable manner System enclosures EG VA 4655 460 x 550 x 260 mm Ex e Il stainless steel enclosure with hinge jointed door and window visible range 340 x 80 mm for housing the excom module rack Special characteristics Base body with bent drip rail 4 welded on outer plates E 2profile rails C profile on rubber stops to stabilize the module racks E 2CU rails nickel plated as shield rails for applying the cable shields M6 grounding bolts internally welded on M8 grounding bolts externally welded on The flange plate and the front door are delivered with the base body Note i The M8 grounding bolt external must be connected to the equipotential bonding with a cable with at least min 6 mm diameter D301266 0113 excom 201 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area Table 157 Population possibilities 1 x MT16 module rack Designs of the stainless steel enclosures Version 1 Dr
220. om 123 excom system components Parameters AIH41Ex Note Please take the bit assignment AIH41Ex page 278 Table 97 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for AIH41Ex Cable monitoring on Cable monitoring is activated or deactivated off Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA HART status measurement range off 0 20 mA off 4 20 mA on 4 20 mA off 0 20 mA Dead zero without HART status request Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 0 to the host system off 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system on 4 20 mA Live zero without HART status request HART diagnosis active Wire breakage and measurement range shortfall are active With substitute value strategy gateway sends min Value 3 6 mA to the host system excom sends two different HART error codes to the PLS Error code 30 and error code 31 Error code 30 The HART variables are invalid only information is issued that the HART device status is erroneous Error code 31 The HART variables are inv
221. om is a remote l O system for installation in Zone 1 and Zone 2 as well as Zone 21 and Zone 22 The intrinsically safe field current circuits are approved for Zone 0 and Zone 20 5 4 1 Connection of the PLC programmable logic controller or SPC stored program control The connection to the PLC or the SPC is done via the PROFIBUS DP Use copper cables for the connection in this case an approved segment coupler or fiber optic cable must be used with respective external converter If redundancy is required two gateways with the same firmware and hardware must be used 5 4 2 Connection of the supply The external supply voltage is connected to the module rack via terminals with the protection class Ex e increased safety and fed to the 24 VDC power supply units or power supply modules 24 VDC power supply units or power supply modules can also be hot swapped in Zone 1 and Zone 21 If redundancy is required use two power supply units or power supply modules 5 4 3 Connection of the peripherals The connection of the peripherals this means sensors and actuators that are installed in the Ex range is accomplished via terminals on the module carrier The modules have ignition protection class Intrinsic Safety and provide safe galvanic isolation The modules sensors and actuators can be swapped during operation Connection of intrinsically safe field current circuits The field current circuit connections on the module racks of the ex
222. on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 AJ Wl N reserved 00000000 274 D301266 0113 excom AIH40Ex 4H A 11 AIH40Ex 4H Industr A Table 203 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No AIHA40Ex 4H 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 665 11 2925 2 K1 SV3 O off 1 on 3 K1 SV4 O off 1 on 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring 0 on 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring O on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 0 K1 SV 1 0 off 1 on 1 K1 SV 2 0 off 1 on 2 K2 SV1 0 off 1 on 3 K2 SV 2 0 off 1 on 4 K3 SV 1 0 off 1 on 5 K3 SV 2 0 off 1 on 6 K4 SV1 0 off 1 on 7 K4 SV 2 0 off 1 on D301266 0113 excom 275 Addendum parameters A 12 AIH40Ex 1H Table 204 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No AIH40Ex 1H 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 6 s 11 29 2 s 2 3 HART
223. on the digitalized value is expanded from 0 21000 and sent to the host system HART compatibility of the modules The module connects to HART compatible sensors that directly communicate with the integrated HART controller Up to 8 HART variables max 4 per channel can be read via the cyclic user data communication of the PROFIBUS DP The bidirectional variable exchange between host system and HART transmitter is handled via PROFIBUS DPV1 services Configuration and data volume The module AIH41Ex operates as a true input card with additional status bit for each channel When a status message is pending the status bit of the respective channel is set to 1 in the input word The status bit is set when an error occurs that initiates a diagnostic message 120 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Depending on the configuration the data volume is different The following configurations are possible Industr A Table 92 Input word Output word Type Configuration Configuration of the AIH41Ex 4 AIH41Ex without cyclic HART data 6 AIHATEx 1H 1 cyclic HART variable 12 AIH41Ex 4H 4 cyclic HART variables 20 AIH41Ex 8H 8 cyclic HART variables Note i The module hardware is identical despite the different configuration The behavior of the module is only influenced by the harware manager via the control or
224. on for the max number of bus participants D301266 0113 excom 173 excom bus components Figure 64 Segmenting a PLC system with PROFIBUS DP master card PROFIBUS DP PC with network PROFIBUS DP Example Node 1 Piaget cara or Bus segment 1 THEE i Node 2 Node 31 Node 32 1 Repeater Bus segment 2 Node 2 31 2 Repeater Node 32 pd here last repeater p 1 Node 2 32 174 D301266 0113 excom Segment coupler SC 12Ex Industr A 4 2 Segment coupler SC12Ex 4 2 1 General information about SC12 Ex The segment coupler SC12Ex makes it possible that excom can be connected to each system via PROFIBUS DP connection master functionality The adjustment of standard RS485 to intrinsically safe RS485 IS occurs in the segment coupler The transmission is done via copper cables The coupler provides two intrinsically safe RS485 IS lines Next to the general function of the segement coupler the SC12Ex has additional characteristics E The repeater functionality of the segment coupler ensures that the amplitude and phase of the signal are regenerated thus there will be no loss of signal strength and quality C
225. onfiguration with redundancy 21 Different firmware with redundancy 22 Error function of the internal bus CAN error 23 Error function of the internal bus passive CAN error 24 Error in power supply unit or power supply module 1 25 Error in power supply unit or power supply module 2 26 Starting up after Watchdog Reset 27 Redundancy switch has taken place 28 Redundant gateway is missing 29 Redundant gateway is not ready 30 Redundant gateway has an error 31 Redundant gateway has no PROFIBUS DP communication Table 181 Code No Meaning Error code for the I O modules 16 Cable error 17 reserved 18 Internal address conflict 19 Unknown module type Nominal configuration 20 Unknown module type Actual configuration 21 reserved 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent 23 to 29 reserved 30 HART status error 31 HART communication error D301266 0113 excom 243 excom Start up 6 7 10 Redundancy status with line redundancy and system redundancy The different redundancy statuses this means normal operation or error are displayed via the status diagnosis the Channel specific diagnosis page 240 slot 0 Channel 0 and the LEDs of both gateways The following events may occur 1 R SWITCH OVER Redundancy was switched is reset after 10 seconds Table 182 active gateway passive gateway Error code active gateway Redundancy Status PRIO LED off PRIO LED briefl
226. ons do not adopt excessive temperatures and whose nominal voltage does not exceed the value of 1 kV Explosive atmosphere An explosive atmosphere contains flammable mixtures of gases vapours mist and dusts with air under atmospheric conditions Explosive atmosphere dangerous A dangerous explosive atmosphere is a mixture containing concentrations of flammable gases or vapours that when ignited can cause damage to persons directly or indirectly through an explosion Explosive mixture general term A combustible flammable mixture is a mixture of gases or vapours or a mixture of gases and vapours with mists and dusts capable of propelling a reaction after ignition Explosion hazardous area An explosion hazardous area is a location where a potentially explosive atmosphere may exist due to local operating conditions Explosion hazard An explosion hazard exists in locations E in which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapours can exist under normal operating conditions or because of repair or leakage and when these conditions provide the probability that a dangerous fuel to air mixture will occur where the explosive or ignitable mixtures can come in contact with a source of ignition and continue to burn after ignition D301266 0113 excom 259 Glossary 260 Explosion protection primary The primary method of explosion protection comprises measures which prevent formation of a dangerous atmospher
227. or frequently guide value gt 1000 h a Zone1 Zone 1 are locations in which an explosive or dangerous explosive atmosphere is likely to occur Likelyhood of the occurrence of an ignitable mixture occasionally during normal operation guide value 10 1000 h a Zone 2 Zone 2 are locations in which an explosive or dangerous explosive atmosphere is likely to occur only rarely and if only for a short time Likelyhood of the occurrence of an ignitable mixture unlikely or rarely and then only for a short time guide value lt 10 h a D301266 0113 excom 261 Glossary 262 D301266 0113 excom A 10 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 18 A 19 A 20 A 21 A 22 A 23 A 24 A 25 Industr A Addendum parameters GDP 265 DM80Ex DM80EX S sseesecsccccccceccccccccceccccecececccccecococccseccoceccesccececccosecececsessceccececseccccececseseceecessecececeesssse 266 DMB80Ex 81 DMB80EX S 8l sccceccccscccceccccsecececccssccococccscccoceccesccececccesecececsessccccececseccccecessesceeocessecececeessose 267 DIZOEX ooscssssooooossscososoossososoeooseosseseosssoosesoosvosssssosooosssseceoeosssseosooossossosoososssosovoossssosocoosssesssosososessoosssssss 268 jeu o ssossoooossscoeseoossosssoeoossososseoosoooossoosvososssoosoocosseosseosseseosoocososossvosssseosovososssosoeosssssosoocososssssessssoss 269
228. ot 9 Slot 8 19 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Slot 16 D301266 0113 excom 239 excom Start up 6 7 6 Channel specific diagnosis The channel specific diagnosis starts with byte 20 For each channel error 3 bytes are generated If a channel has more than one error e g overflow and HART status both errors are transmitted in sequence Table 177 Byte Bit No Channel specific No diagnosis 20 Bit 7 6 Bit5 0 Header Slot No 10 0 24 21 Bit 7 6 Bit 5 0 l O type Channel No 00 reserved 01 Input 10 Output 11 Input output 22 Bit 7 5 Bit 4 0 Channel type Error code refer to Manufacturer specific error codes page 243 000 reserved 001 1 bit 010 2 bit 011 4 bit 100 1 byte 101 1 word 110 2 words 111 reserved 23 next channel error 240 D301266 0113 excom Diagnoses per EN 61158 6 7 7 Structure of the alarm component If a diagnostic alarm was parameterized via the DPV1 status byte the diagnostic block Alarm Component is added to the channel specific diagnosis Industr A Table 178 Byte No Bit No Alarm component Byte y Bit 7 6 Bit 5 0 Header Length 00 000100 Bytey 1 Bit7 Bit 6 0 Alarm identification Alarm type 0 000 0001 Bytey 2 Bit 7 0 Slot No 0x00 Byte y 3 Bit 7 2 Bit 1 0 Alarm se
229. ovide a solution This means the shield is not directly connected to the equipotential bonding but across a Capacity The shield design must match the overall design Four shield designs can be used and are supported by the coupler system SC12Ex as well as by the current module racks with the help of different shield connections 1 The connections are connected to the earth potential on both sides hard grounded on both sides conditional recommendation 2 The connection on the feeding device is hard grounded the connections of all segment participants are capacitively grounded page 220 recommended 3 The connection on the feeding device is capacitively grounded the connections of all segment participants are hard grounded not recommended 4 The connection on the feeding device is capacitively grounded the connections of all segment participants are also capacitively grounded not recommended Note o When delivered the shield is capacitively connected to the earth potential In order to have direct earth the insulating disk must be removed from under the screw marked Shield Shield connection SC12Ex page 217 9 not used Figure 92 Shield connection SC12Ex Swel D301266 0113 excom 217 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area Note i The excom module rack connects the shield connection of the RS485 IS cable to the earth with the help of an i
230. pole terminal block cage clamp terminal blue Figure 109 Terminal block STB16 4RC 1 5 BU 258 D301266 0113 excom 9 Industr A Glossary Intrinsic safety explosion protection type i EN 60079 11 All other protection types except intrinsic safety attempt to contain the explosion to the inside of the housing and to prevent penetration of an ignitable gaseous mixture The method of intrinsic safety is based on a different approach It limits the electrical energy of a circuit to such an extent that excessive temperatures cannot occur or arcs and sparcs are incapable of generating the energy needed to ignite an explosive atmosphere Due to the limited energy these circuits are mainly suited to application in the field of measuring control and instrumentation Intrinsic safety has some inherent advantages over other protection types For example wiring and maintenance of live circuits Intrinsically safe electrical equipment Intrinsically safe electrical equipment is any apparatus in which all circuits are intrinsically safe Direct installation in hazardous locations is permitted provided that all related requirements are met An example is a NAMUR sensor approved according to EN 60947 5 6 or a transmitter Increased safety protection type e EN 60079 7 Protection type e applies to electrical equipment or components of electrical equipment which do not generate sparcs or arcs under normal conditi
231. ponents 3 3 5 Power supply module PSM24 3G Power supply module for 24 VDC feed Application in Zone 2 possible Figure 16 PSM24 3G 42 LES LIS Cice Vo em le A C he D ce ome The power supply module PSM24 3G supplies the excom system up to full expansion The power supply module has a module design and can be used in Zone 2 The PSM24 3G has a supply voltage of 19 5 32 VDC The external supply is connected via Ex e terminals on the module rack Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock No work must be done on the Ex e terminals under voltage The terminals are mounted under a protective cover Interference must only occur when the respective supply voltage has been switched off Redundancy of PSM24 3G Two power supply modules can be used in combination with a suitable module rack When one device fails or when the supply line is interrupted the other device supplies the entire system Different potentials can be used for the supply D301266 0113 excom Supply of the excom system Technical data PSM24 3G Industr A Table 10 Type code PSM24 3G Technical data PSM24 3G Supply voltage external 19 5 32 V DC ripple Wo 10 96 Power consumption lt 665W Power output lt 60W Rated voltage 40 V Ex approval PTB 12 ATEX 2009 Marking Il 3 2 G Ex nAc ic ib IIC T4 LED displays Operating readiness 1x green Error mes
232. position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA n 1 2 3 014 Floating point format of the HART variables The HART variable are displayed as follows Table 108 Byte Meaning Floating point format n Prefix Exponent 28 2 26 2 2 23 2 2 n 1 Exponent Mantissa 2 2 2 23 24 2 2 27 n 2 Mantissa 28 2 2 10 2 2 29 24 275 n 3 Mantissa 2716 2V 218 27 2 20 2 2 2 132 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Industr A The input data of the module and the HART variables are mapped as follows This case here involves a module with 8 cyclic HART variables Table 109 Input word No Output word No Content Data mapping 1 Output channel 1 2 Output channel 2 3 Output channel 3 4 Output channel 4 1 2 HART Variable 1 3 4 HART Variable 2 5 6 HART Variable 3 7 8 HART Variable 4 9 10 HART Variable 5 11 12 HART Variable 6 13 14 HART Variable 7 15 16 HART Variable 8 A The HART variables are displayed in the Floating Point data format Note All secondary variables that were activated at parameterization are assigned to a slot in the mapped input data also when no HART compatible device is connected to the respective channels Measurement ranges Table 110 Measurement value Transmitted value Measurement value
233. pply 47 excom system components 3 3 8 Use of the power supply unit cover BM PS For the unpopulated power supply unit or AC DC converter slot the power supply unit cover BM PS is available Figure 21 Power supply unit cover BM PS Attention Possible damage to device caused by intruding foreign objects Empty slots for power supply units or AC DC converters must be covered with an IP20 cover 48 D301266 0113 excom Certified system enclosures Industr A 3 4 Certified system enclosures 3 4 1 General information The certified system enclosures consist of a stainless steel enclosure with ignition protection type Increased Safety e with integrated module rack sizes MT16 or MT24 The module rack can be populated with different modules In addition one or two filters are built in The system enclosures already have system approval and this is why the user is not required to approve individual components of the assembly All components are tested and certified according to separate verification certificates The installation or rather assembly is done in the factory to meet the required distances as well as air and creep distances The TURCK Ex stainless steel enclosures are used in the Ex area Zone 1 approved and also suitable for harsh and aggressive environments The system enclosures are designed in such a way that a maximum population with power supply unit or power supply module and I O modules
234. quence No relevant for H machine 0000 00 15 A 0000001 Diagnostic alarm 0000010 process alarm not supported by excom 000001 1 pull alarm not supported by excom 0000100 plug alarm not supported by excom B 00 Process pull and plug alarm 01 at least one error present 10 leaving error 11 reserved D301266 0113 excom 241 excom Start up 6 7 8 Error codes per PROFIBUS DP standard excom supported error codes per the regulations of PROFIBUS DP standard Table 179 Code Meaning Error codes 0 reserved 1 Short circuit 2 3 4 Overload 5 Over temperature 6 Wire breakage 7 Upper limit value exceeded Overflow U lt 1 8 V I lt 3 6 mA 8 Lower limit value not reached Underflow U gt 10 5 V I gt 21 mA 9 Error 10 to 15 reserved 16 to 31 Manufacturer specific excom 242 D301266 0113 excom Diagnoses per EN 61158 Industr A 6 7 9 Manufacturer specific error codes Principally the meaning of the transmitted error codes for each slot or each module type can be different in a modular slave With excom there are different interpretations for the gateway and for the I O modules Table 180 Error code No Meaning Error codes for gateway 16 ROM error diagnosis iia PARCEL 18 EEPROM error 19 Starting up after a cold start 20 Different c
235. rameterized in the master The stand by gateway responds to the FDL telegram and thus is visible for the master The switch can be initiated by the master or independently by the gateways By activating the Parameter Address Offest on and by entering an Address Offset Value other than 0 the redundant gateway receives an excom internal virtual bus address basis address for the excom station Address Offset Value Based on the set virtual bus address the redundant gateway responds to the polling of all non configured slaves of the network with the help of the PROFIBUS master and sends a receipt With this receipt the communication readiness of the redundact gateway is tested D301266 0113 excom Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP Industr A 6 3 3 Systemredundancy hardware With system redundancy two from each other independentPROFIBUS DP masters work with one excom station With system redundancy the excom station has two head stations gateways which are forced into cyclic data exchange by the assigned master Both masters must configure and parameterize the redundant slave completely identical One of the two head stations operates as primary head station the second as secondary The primary gateway accepts the output data sent by the master and sends them to the output modules In addition the primary gateway sends the currently valid input values The secondary gateway ignores the received output
236. rate via the rotary switch on the OCTTEX seen tnnt nnt nnne ttt no ttts nnn ttt notes 185 Converting the RS485 signal into the RS485 IS Ex i signal with the OCT11E x eene tnnt 185 LED dISpla c Increasing system stability via redundancy switches with OC1T1Ex Technical data for OC11Ex 2G 2 and OC11Ex 3G 2 eese ener tentent tento tenentes sette ttti ttt ta ttt skasttsna 189 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area 191 General safety instructions cccccccccccsscrssscccccccccscccsccccsccccccccccccccescccesccssccceccccscccecccccscccccscccscceses 192 Correct Operation YX 192 Conformity to standards of excom eee eee ee eene eene eene s eee e eaae see e esee esee eese ees se esse e osse sse se sepes esses seas neas 193 Installation of excom in the Ex area and Non Ex area ee ee eee e eee eee eee ee esee eee esses eese ss eee eese eosoo 193 Connection of the PLC programmable logic controller or SPC stored program control sss 193 Connection OF the SUP PHY e M 193 Connection of the peripherals eccsscssesssscssesssssssessessssesssssssessscssscssessssessscssscsssssssssssssssssssssscecscessecsseesseesscesseesscessecescesseeeseeenseesees 193 5 4 4 5 4 5 5 4 6 5 4 7 5 5 5 6 5 6 1 6 1 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3
237. rminal auto f 1 25 kHz 4 5 A Substitute value output 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 7 A Substitute value input 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 292 D301266 0113 excom DF20Ex P Industr A Table 217 Forts Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No DF20Ex P 2 0 A1 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 1 A2 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 2 A3 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 3 A4 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 4 5 A Measurement range 00 0 100 Hz 01 0 1 kHz 10 0 4 kHz 6 A Release 0 host controlled 1 Terminal 7 A Edge count O ascending 1 ascending descending 3 0 B Counter 0 host controlled reset 1 Terminal 1 B De chattering 0 off Control inputs 1 50 ms 2 3 B Direction recognition 00 forward f 4 kHz 01 host controlled f 4 kHz 10 Terminal f 4 kHz 11 Terminal auto f 1 25 kHz 4 5 B Substitute value output 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 7 B Substitute value input 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value D301266 0113 excom 293 Addendum parameters Table 217 Forts Parameter for DF20Ex P 294 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values No 4 0 B1 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 1 B2 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 2 B3 Polarity 0 normal 1 inverted 3 B4 Polarity 0
238. ror wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present D301266 0113 excom 107 excom system components Technical data Table 77 Type code AO401Ex Technical data AO401Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 22W Outputs 4 analog actuators Open circuit voltage 16V DC Output current 0 4 20 mA per output External working resistance lt 6400 Short circuit lt 50 Q only at Live zero Wire breakage lt 2 mA only with Live zero Resolution 13 bit Linearity error lt 0 05 from end value Temperature drift lt 0 005 K Rise time fall time lt 50 ms 10 90 Ex approval PTB 00 ATEX 2179 Marking I2 1 G Exib ial IC T4 11 1 D Ex iaD Ex max values field circuits Ex ia IIC IIB Open circuit voltage U lt 189V Short circuit current 80mA Max power P 510mW Characteristic curve trapezoid Max internal inductance L negligible Max internal capacity C negligible Max external inductance IIC IIB capacity La Co Ly mH Co pF C pF 2 0 0 12 1 1 0 0 12 1 0 5 0 14 1 0 2 0 18 1 2 General information Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 a
239. rror codes to the PLS Error code 30 and error code 31 Error code 30 The HART variables are invalid only information is issued that the HART device status is erroneous Error code 31 The HART variables are invalid the HART communication is erroneous Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 HART variable primary Selection of the HART variables secondary 1 secondary 2 secondary 3 secondary 4 HART variable of Channel 1 Selection of the channel No belonging to the channel Channel 2 HART variable Channel 3 Channel 4 D301266 0113 excom 125 excom system components AIH41EX 4H 0 Please take the bit assignment AIH41Ex 4H page 279 In this configuration the module also sends 4 HART variables to the cyclic data communication Table 99 Parameter for AIH41Ex 4H 126 Parameter name Value Meaning Cable monitoring on Cable monitoring is activated or deactivated off Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The max value is 21 mA The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 Channel 1 SV1 SV4 on off Activation deactivation of the secondary variable Channel 2
240. rve 81 Configuration and data volume 82 Connection figures ceci epit tede dinde diui a Nn e sed riti in or RR rr RI EE 82 s Pataktietefs rendi osriteivi sna iese e PUE IP eI ESI P dira eiu Sive en eise set es tr d orbes cos osteo s0s Cost re usea cen vo svsssoasestbesutseastasspeassedaunies 83 Channel specific modulediagnosis eese ttenntnttennn tenente tnnt seseessscecsnssessnseeesssceesnssecesnseesene 83 Fun tion OF TE bz DIRE m 84 Tech iCal hated ERE 85 Analog modules 2 86 AI401Ex analog input module 4 ChANNE 0 csssecsssscsseecsseessscecsscccsecceseecsueecsncesseccssesssstesseessseesuseceesecesseesaseceescecsueccsneecsneeesueess 86 Configuration and data volume csssccsssscssssscesssecssseecssssscesssseessececsnseecenssscesseeecsnseecenseecesssscesnsescesnseecsnseeecsnseeceuseeecenseeceunseesane Connection FIQUIES ee Parameters sexdecim petes e ER RENE M AEn er ait vro ruote Yero ie rere E Hle ihe eed ui eati E der ERES Channel specific module diagnosis ee tette tenente teens not ttts ttts niti no tttts ttis nist notis no ttts nones Function of the LEDS sette Technical data Al41Ex analog input module 4 channel Configuration and data volume csssecsssessssccsseecssecssscessecsssccsssecsueccsneessuecesseesssecsssesssscessece
241. s passive input not feeding transducer active All 4 channels respectively have a current input for 0 to 21mA and a voltage input for 0 to 10 V Connection of the periphery is selectable The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus is suitable for use in excom Zone 1 applications The ignition protection class of the inputs is Ex ia IIC Note The inputs are galvanically isolated from each other The behavior of the inputs is parameterized via the PROFIBUS DP master Possible parameters are subsitute value strategy connection type measuring range and input delay The resolution is 14 bit which means the analog value of 0 21 mA is digitalized as a number between 0 and 16383 For simple presentation the digitalized value is expanded from 0 21000 and sent to the host system The value 0 10 V is sent as a digital value 0 10000 HART Ability HART able actuators can be connected to the module Thus parameterization can be done with an approved modem directly at the connection level on the module rack HART ability means it is possible to directly connect to the terminals of the transmitter via a FSK modem The respective burden is integrated in the module Configuration and data volume The module Al41Ex operates as a true input card with an additional status bit for each channel When a status message is pending the status bit of the respective channel is set to 1 in the input word depending on the d
242. s Offset with line on redundancy D301266 0113 excom 59 excom system components Table 19 cont Parameters gateway 60 Parameter name Value Meaning Offset value 0 124 Address Offset to generate a virtual address for Default 0 the redundant gateway Standard value 0 CAN redundancy off Redundancy of the internal communication on between gateway and I Os SF2 SF3 reserved The following parameter exclusively refers to the gateway configuration with the add on C cyclic data or YO control data for the Yokogawa redundancy to the product name cyclic data The default value of this parameter is 0 and must not be changed Depending on the configuration in the network configurator of the control software the gateway GDP IS can be equipped with an additional function These additional functions are identified by adding C cyclic data or YO control data for Yokogawa redundancy to the product name refer to Configuration of the gateway page 247 C In this configuration the gateway provides an input word and an output word The input data word and the output data word are used as status and control register of the gateway These status descriptions are used to indicate for example which of the two gateways is active and which is passive when the redundancy is switched If a gateway fails this status information can be collected and as a measure the adj
243. s installed in the Non Ex area or Zone 2 The coupler OC11Ex 3G 2 accepts the PROFIBUS DP signals on its standard RS485 interface and sends them to the TURCK Zone 1 coupler OC11Ex 2G 2 via the intrinsically safe fiber optic cable interface D301266 0113 excom 185 excom bus components 4 3 6 LED displays The coupler has a status LED for the connected PROFIBUS DP segment a status LED for the connected LWL cable an operation LED for the voltage supply and a status LED for automatic baud rate recognition Table 153 Ug Statement meaning LEDs supply green Input voltage ok voltage off Input voltage too low Table 154 RS485 LWL Statement meaning LEDs for red Error in the PROFIBUS DP fiber optic cable PROFIBUS DP segment interface yellow Receipt of valid data off No data communication Table 155 Auto baud rate Statement meaning LEDs for baud constantly yellow Baud rate recognized rate recognition setting of the blinking yellow Baud rate recognition active baud rate 7 off Baud rate setting via rotary switch 186 D301266 0113 excom Segment coupler OC 11Ex Industr A 4 3 7 Increasing system stability via redundancy switches with OC11Ex Next to the SUB D PROFIBUS DP connection the devices OC11Ex 3G 2 and OC11Ex 2G 2 have an 8 mm snap in female connector This female connector is a redundancy connection to a second OC11 with which
244. s used When the converter sub rack MT PPS with 230 115 VAC is used an AC DC converter is also connected per power supply unit or power supply module The gateways are masters for the internal data bus and slaves for the higher level fieldbus and regulate the entire data communication between an l O module and a process control system PCS The gateway provides the expanded PROFIBUS DP diagnosis this means that diagnostic data including channel specific error messages are made available to the user The data transmission to the PCS can be executed with suitable TURCK couplers via fiber optic or copper cables In order to increase availability and failure safety a second gateway is alloted redundancy when the MT16 MT24 is used D301266 0113 excom Performance characteristics of the excom system Industr A Note It is possible to replace a redundant power supply unit or power supply module as well as a redundant gateway during operation When replacing a defective gateway please note that the new device must have the same firmware revision than the redundant gateway The I O modules are the interface to the periphery that is connected via the connection level of the field current circuits The digital modules analog modules and function modules permit the connection of field devices with protection class Ex ia IIC A total of up to 24 I O modules can be operated with the module rack MT24 and 16 l O modules wit
245. sage 1x red General information Galvanic isolation safe between input and output circuit Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity lt 95 at 55 C per EN 60068 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 Mounting Module design pluggable into module rack Dimensions B x H x T mm 18x118x 103 D301266 0113 excom 43 excom system components 3 3 6 AC DC converter PPSA230Ex or rather PPSA115Ex E For 230 115 VAC feed E AC DC conversion of supply voltage into an unregulated direct voltage 24 VDC E Use on module rack MT PPS Only usable with downstream power supply unit or downstream power supply module B Application in Zone 1 possible Figure 17 PPSA230Ex and PPSA115Ex The AC DC converter PPSA230Ex or rather the PPSA115Ex supplies the excom system up to full expansion The converter has a combined protection class Ex m and Ex e and can be used in Zone 1 The converter is fully potted and housed in an aluminum protective enclosure The PPSA230Ex has a supply voltage of 230 VAC and the PPSA115Ex has a supply voltage of 115 VAC The external supply is connected via Ex e terminals on the module rack Redundancy of PPSA230Ex or rather PPSA115Ex Two converters can be used in combination with the module rack MT PPS When one device fails or when the supply line is interrupted the other dev
246. scessscecstcessuccsssecessecsssessecesueesscesscesseeesscecsuecesneeesneesees 75 Configuration and data volume Connection figures Parameters sse 77 Channel specific modulediagnosis eee eterne nnn tttennnttt netten tento ttis tno tiones nent ttt nno tnos ttnotitsnnns 77 Functiomofthe LEDS omorii nnt c 78 Technical data ete reet qeu d irteetsetie teuer tes deep co uas E T E 79 DO401Ex digital output module 4 channel ee eerte tenente nnne netos testi tttt si ttts satis ie tte ssistts essit 80 Valve conttol tete en Load curve ee Configuration and data volume Connection FIG ULES e Parameters ate RR RIRs e E e REQUIRERE EUR edu de NAR sabvangnctauesecsivesussbese tes sosaucos AS Channel specific modulediagnosis ee ee eeenn tenent ttennnnttttnnnnttennttteno ns sassessssssessssssssssssesssseesssseesssseesss 83 Function of the E EDS eie tetti tette teet edente eet aaa istae ania Aa abeo dita tanet aiao a saias 84 EE eileiie oic 85 Analog modules 86 AI401Ex analog input module 4 channel 00 secccssscsssecsseccseeccssccescecsneccsnecesnecssseccssecesscessscesssccssccessscesssccsseecesceesueccsnecesneeesnseeets 86 Configuration and data volume sssssscssssscessssccssssecssssecsssss
247. se sete 20 excom system components eeee eee eee eese eoo eese osse eeeoosess e eesossoeeeeseseseeeeeossssseesossssseessssss Z3 Overview of system architecture e eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eese esses eese sees eee se ees ss ess osss osse osse sss ss sss ss esses esee seen 27 Module racks module sub racks of the excom system SCTISIEINDE bo pm ES Module rack MT16 2G ese eeeeeee teen ttnntttnntn Dimensional drawing of the module rack MT16 2G Module rack MT16 3G e eeeeeee teen ttentttsnto nocte Dimensional drawing of the module rack MT16 3G ssssssssccssssecssssecessssecsnscceessscerssseecsnseecessscessnseecsnssecsseeessnseecensscessnseesens jore Viger qc Dimensional drawing of the module rack MT24 3G eee nennen tentent nennt ttnnnte nnt notti to not tnenottsnnns Converter sub rack MT PPS etis tont tondere htl veto es ee eee eene eed ie e REDE eee deae cibi tee Dimensional drawing of the converter sub rack MT PPS Technical data of the module racks converter sub racks Mounting the module racks se a Address switch on the module rack and addressing sssssscsssssccsssccsnssecsnssseesnscecssscecssssecessscecssssscesssecsseceesssceesnseecenssecesnseesene PROFIBUS DP ad
248. secesuseesusecsaccessuccsseeesseecesnecesecsaseeste x GOMMECUIO MTG ULES TEE ELLE PAL AITVCT TERTII et Channel specific module DIAGNOSIS eseesssssssscssesscesseeecsssescessececssseecesseccesnsceceuseccssnscesusseseesseeeseeecunsesecsseeesusceesunsesceusessnsseessuees Function of the LEDs sse Technical data AI43Ex analog input module 4 channel 5 Configuration and data volume sssssecsssecssssesesccssecssscesstecsssecsssecsueccsnecesuecessecssseessseessscessseessecesssecsuscesseeessseceseeeeseeessneceseeesaseeste Connection iU zu Para MO O E IURATI EDEN Channel specific module DIAGNOSIS sssssssseeecsssescessseecssssecessseecssssecesssecesnssecessssecsnssecssseecesussesueecesuseecsnssesesseecesnsneessneeeesnesees Function of the LEDs sse Technical data AO401Ex analog output module 4 channel Configuration and data volume ssscsssecsssecsssccseeecsssessscesscesseeccusecsueccsnecssnecessecsssecssscessscesseccesccesseeesascesseeseseessueessueeesneecsssessasees ConrniectiornfigUtes c etienne renis eects vaddos veria E veri venti de vast vens bush ete vastus vetere eec vae ves Parameters qe e Channel specific module diagnosis ee eee terere ttt nets tttennints ttis no ttti ttt notte ntes noit tts notte Function of the LEDs Technical data Analog HART compatible
249. select 0 E sr3 select 0 Stem Hex parameter assignment amp User Prm Data 0 ta 3 C1 01 81 05 Cancel Help D301266 0113 excom 229 excom Start up 6 5 System redundancy The description for designing a system redundancy can be found in Systemredundancy hardware page 227 6 5 1 Parametrization of excom with system redundancy The redundancy for excom is set via the gateway parameters Redundancy Mode Address Offset and Address Offset Value eu SES tr System redundancy T O E ASSONTECE E a cXE Station parameters EHE Device specific parameters H arid frequency 2 analog data Format E backplane E redundancy mode 8 power supply 2 cyclic data 2 HCIR active 2 HCIR WCBC factor E HCIR WCBC base x 100ms 8 address offset E address offset value LIE cari redundancy 50Hz status MSB MT18 O modules tem redundan single select 0 off basex1 5 o disable on select 0 select 0 L C1 03 00 05 Cancel Help 6 5 2 Redundancy modus System Redundancy If the parameter Redundancy Mode is set to System Redundancy excom operates in the system redundancy operating mode Both gateways communicate with the assigned master The active gateway LED PRIO is illuminated accepts the output data sent by the master and sends them
250. seseeseeaseseeses 258 Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU wocicccecsscscsscssssscsssssssssssssessssssssesssessessessessssessssssscssssessessssscsssssessesacsnsesssusseeseesseseeseseeseeseeseeses 258 D301266 0113 excom 11 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 7 A 8 A 10 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 18 A 19 A 20 A 21 A 22 A 23 A 24 A 25 12 Glossary m Yt Addendum parameters eeeee ecce eee eee eee eee esses esse sss ssss s eese esssossesssssssseeseeesessssssssss sss 20 3 GDP 265 DMS80Ex DMB80EX 266 C 267 DIZOEX C 268 DO4OTEX q 269 Ly 270 Liao qe 271 AIAZEX 271 iuo m 272 inu 272 AIHAOEX 4H 273 AIH4OEX 1H
251. ssceunseecenseeceunseeeene Technical data PPSA230Ex PPSA1 15Ex m SUPPI CONCE PiS aniier E E LLL OL RNs 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 44 3 4 5 3 5 3 7 3 7 1 24 VDC supply rEMUAC ANE a a aa a anaa aa Ea EA aiani 46 115 230 VAC supply optionally redundant sscssscssecssssssssscsscccssccesscecsseesssccssnccesnccessccessesssseesssesuccessecesseceseeceseeesneeesnseeets 47 Use of the power supply unit cover BM PS qu csessssssccsssscsscccscccsscesstecssscessccssuecessccessecessecssscessscesssccesseceescesusecsasecescceseeesnecsnseestecs 48 Certified system enclosures General information Type COM Gia atte e tte tete i 4 Mounting instructions for the system enclosures sssesscccssssecssesscesssccessececssnsecessscesssssecssseccessnsessseessueeeseseeesneecesnesecanseeessneseess 51 Ambient conditions during the installation eterne nennen entitas tnnt not tonno tto nosittsnnns 51 Completion of the temperatue test on ececsssecsssccssscccseccsseccescccsscccsseccseeceseecsssecsssecsnscesseccsseccssecsssecesscessscessecssseceseeceseeesneesseeeets 51 Technical data for the system enclosures aonane etes ttes iiaia iaaiiai a ttt notti notes totis nons 52 Accessories for the system enclosures Ventilation bolt ELST M20Ex plastic design A Si EEVA M2OEx stainlesSs steel 2 dnte tese a a eoe naai Modu le r ck accessories ea Rt ertet cete he UE ER Bes aa erect
252. sssecsssscesssssesssssecessseessnssesssssecesussessnsseessnsseeesnssessnssecesussessnssesesnseessnsseseanseees Address switch on the module rack and addressing sssssscsssssccssesccssssecsnsscessssecssseecsnssscessssecsnsescessseeseeecesssecesnseecenssceunseeeene PROFIBUS DP address switch sss Assignment of internal module address Access to the l O addresses sss oa connection to PROFIBUS DP on the module rack sssessccssseccssseecssssecessseeessssecessseeesssccesusecssnssecessseessnceesuseessnseesesnseessnseesesaneees Supply of the excom systeim cccccccsscssoccccsccsccccccssccccccscccscccccsscccccccssssscscsssccsecessscsccsscssscsssesssseseccees 38 IST elio dea dle EE 38 Power supply units or power supply module types e tees ttes tee ntes tentat tts ns ttnnt tts nn tton ttes ttes tst nniss 38 connection of the supply voltage via Ex e connection terminals Power supply unit PSD24Ex sees Redundancy of PSD24Ex eterne tentent tento tenente ra i 40 Mounting of the power supply units PSD24Ex to the backplane MT16 2G ou csssscsssscssssccnssesssecsssecssecssecesseeceneeesseeete 41 Technical ticaosbpzinq Power supply module PSM24 3G e vs cccssisssssscsccsssscconscacsssdececscec sossacoutsasiesbassenbeachadcectsacancesbsecoeuiasieaiendhsnesutesssutiseraetaspucbcensoedbapsebaoesnais d T
253. status measurement 00 off 0 20 mA range 01 off 4 20 mA 10 on 4 20 mA 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring O on 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0 on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 0 1 HART variable of channel 00 Channel 1 01 Channel 2 10 Channel 3 11 Channel 4 2 3 4 HART variable 000 primary 001 Secondary 1 010 Secondary 2 011 Secondary 3 100 Secondary 4 5 6 7 reserved 000 276 D301266 0113 excom AIH40Ex 8H A 13 AIH40Ex 8H Industr A Table 205 Parameter for AIH40Ex 8H Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values No 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 65 11 2925 2 K1 SV3 O off 1 on 3 K1 SV4 O off 1 on 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring 0 on 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring O on 1 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 0 K1 SV 1 0 off 1 on 1 K1 SV 2 0 off 1 on 2 K2 SV1 0 off 1 on 3 K2 SV 2 0 off 1 on 4 K3 S
254. status bit is set when an error occurs that initiates a diagnostic message D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Industr A The analog value of 0 21 mA is recalculated as a number in Bit 15 with 1uA Digit and sent to the host system Depending on the selection of the gateway parameters Analog data format page 265 the status bit is integrated into the process data left aligned right aligned or it is not integrated at all Table 49 Input byte Output byte Type Configuration Configuration of the Al401Ex 8 Al401Ex Input module with status The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the input word e g of the first channel Table 50 Bit position of the input word of the n th channel Bit assignment of the input word Parameter Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BitO Status MSB SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to Oto 21 mA Status LSB Bit position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA SB without Bit position of the measurement value 0 21000 equates to 0 to 21 mA status D301266 0113 SB Status Bit settable via the gateway parameters n 1 2 30r4 excom 87 excom system components Connection figures The input module AI401Ex can be connected as active input to a 2 wire transducer or as passive input to a 4 wire
255. suitable for use in excom Zone 1 applications The ignition protection class of the outputs is Ex ia IIC Note The outputs are galvanically isolated from each other The behavior of the outputsis is parameterized via the PROFIBUS DP master Possible parameters are subsitute value strategy short circuit monitoring wire breakage monitoring and measurement range The resolution is 13 bit which means the analog value of 0 21 mA is represented as number between 0 and 8191 For simple handling the host system operates with the value range from 0 21000 This raw value is reduced by the AO401Ex to 13 bit resolution HART Ability HART able actuators can be connected to the module Thus parameterization can be done with an approved modem directly at the connection level on the module rack HART ability means it is possible to directly connect to the terminals of the transmitter via a FSK modem The respective burden is integrated in the module Configuration and data volume Table 71 Input byte Output byte Type Configuration Configuration of the AO401Ex 8 AO401Ex Output module 104 D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Industr A The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the output word e g of the first channel Table 72 Bit position of the output word of the n th channel Bit assignment of the outputword Bitl5 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit 0
256. supply under the cover Bridge for possible grounding of the shield of the data cable Two 9 pole SUB D connectors for PROFIBUS RS485 IS Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP page 225 Rotary switch for setting the network address Address switch on the module rack and addressing page 36 Connection layer for the Ex i field devices MINI COMBICON Slots for two gateways Redundancy strategies for PROFIBUS DP page 225 Slots for max 24 I O modules Grounding bolt m ono IQT Dimensional drawing of the module rack MT24 3G Figure 8 MT24 3G c offofofofofofofofofofofo o fo fofofo fofofofofofo fo ofofofofofoafefofe fotos le ofofofofo fofofofofofo fo 260 235 e 0000 Lesa m eo 9 16 E 32 D301266 0113 excom Module racks module sub racks of the excom system Industr A 3 2 6 Converter sub rack MT PPS The following figure shows the converter sub rack MT PPS
257. t 25 mA 7 Upper limit value exceeded l gt 25 mA 1 Short circuit D301266 0113 excom 117 excom system components Function of the LEDs Table 90 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for this slot green correct operation 118 green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data Channel off red No channel error Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Technical data Industr A Table 91 Type code AIH40Ex active Technical data AIH40Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 3W Inputs 4 analog sensors Supply voltage gt 15 0 V DC at 22 mA on transmitter Input current 0 4 20 mA per input HART impedance gt 240 Q Overcontrol 221mA Undercontrol lt 3 6 mA Short circuit lt 5 V only with Live zero Wire breakage lt 2 mA only with Live zero Resolution 14 bit Linearity error lt 0 1 96 from end value Temperature drift lt 0 005 K Rise time fall time lt 50 ms 10 90 Ex approval PTB 00 ATEX 2059 X Marking 9 112 1 G Exib ia lIC TA II 1 D Ex ia IIIC Ex max value
258. t 55 C per EN 60069 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 108 D301266 0113 excom Analog HART compatible modules Industr A 3 9 Analog HART compatible modules 3 9 1 AIH40Ex analog input module 4 channel Figure 44 Analog input module AIH40Ex The input module AIHAOEx is used to connect intrinsically safe 2 wire transducers active input feeding transducer passive The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and thus can be used in connection with excom in Zone 1 The ignition protection class of the inputs is Ex ia IIC Note e The inputs are not galvanically isolated from each other When connecting the fieldbus please take into consideration that all inputs must have a common mass potential The resolution is 14 bit which means the analog value of 0 21 mA is digitalized as a number between O and 16383 For simple presentation the digitalized value is expanded from 0 21000 and sentto the host system HART compatibility of the modules The module connects to HART compatible sensors that directly communicate with the integrated HART controller Up to 8 HART variables max 4 per channel can be read via the cyclic user data communication of the PROFIBUS DP The bidirectional communication between host system and HART transmitter is handled via PROFIBUS DPV1 services Configuration and data volume The module AIH40Ex operates
259. t channel can be Status LSB mapped into the process input data of the no status channel and the position MSB or LSB can be determined Status MSB Status bit at bit position 2 Status LSB Status bit at 2 no status measurement value without status bit module rack MT8 MT8 8 I O modules MT16 MT16 16 I O modules MT24 MT24 24 I O modules redundancy mode off selection of redundancy type line redundancy system redundancy off gateway without redundancy function line redundancy flying redundancy system redundancy system redundancy power supply module simple With redundant supply via two power supply redundant units PSD24Ex or power supply modules PSM24 3G the power supply module diagnosis is activated with the redundant setting HCIR active off Activation of online configuration on Note This bit must be set with the master before the HCIR sequence starts HCIR WCBC factor Basis x 1 Factor for generating the max switching time Basis x 10 between old and new configuration The configuration can be changed by module replacement hot swapping and configuration expansion configuration in Run during operation During the switching time the outputs are held at the current value HCIR WCBC Basis 0 63 Determines the basis for the switching time x 100 ms Default 5 When the PROFIBUS master supports HCIR this parameter is set automatically Address Offset off Activation of the Addres
260. tem the max current of 4 8 A is valid thus resulting in the following current evaluation per the formula leus gt E lonode 31 X 125 mA 129 mA 4004 mA Thus the current evaluation of the bus system is seen as acceptable D301266 0113 excom 213 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area 214 Evaluation of the external inductance resistance ratio L R or rather of the capacities C In the most simple scenario one can use the limit values determined by the PTB and relate them to the real cable lengths or refer to EN 60079 11 If one chooses the approach permitted by EN 60079 11 deviations may result in regard to the permissible number of participants and the permissible Lo R According to EN 60079 11 2007 Chapter 6 2 3 or rather EN 60079 25 2010 Addendum D the max external inductance resistance ratio L R for a source with ohmic current limiting can be determined with the help of its max values U and ly The max permissible capacity is determined based on the ignition limit curve The safety technical output voltage of all bus participants is U 3 75V Safety technically this is permissible based on U min 4 2 V imin L 32xexR Formula for L 0 Ro 9xUg l U Lo z 32 xex Up or with LENT Ry 9x U Xlo Lo 32xe finally is Ro 9X Up xl e 40 yJ for IIC Lo 32x40x10 AVs uH ised Rc essen LAOA t 2 Ro 9x3 75 V x 4 004 A Q The characteristic data for standard L
261. ter a waiting period of min 30 seconds Operation of the system is only allowed with closed cover Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock Before the auxiliary power supply is switched on the user must check and ensure the compatibility of auxiliary power supply voltage and approved power supply unit or power supply module voltage The distance of the 24 VDC supply to the wall of the enclosure must exceed 5 mm air distance and 8 mm creep distance The installation room for connecting the conductors must have a free space of 20 mm on the side D301266 0113 excom 197 excom Mounting and installation in the Ex area and Non Ex area 198 Connection of the power supply to the PPSA230Ex or the PPSA115Ex All components of the power supply for the excom system must be installed according to the requirements of ignition protection class e Increased Safety per EN 60079 7 The max approved wire width is E rigid 4mm E flexible 2 5 mm The tightening torque is min 0 5 Nm and max 0 6 Nm The auxiliary power must be protected with a cable safety fuse of 5 A The regulations per der EN 6007914 VDE 0165 Part 1 especially Chapter 11 of the standard additional requirements for ignition protection class e Increased Safety must be met The connections can be found under a IP30 cover Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock The cover must only be opened after the volta
262. terminating resistance esseee 176 184 Protective earth eene 3 R redundancy 2 gateway icc te ebrei arde 179 187 Sline eec te t deri 179 187 OCT TEXN usciuce taie e dicite pii te dr ea da ie ree 187 RS485 IS PROFIBUS DP sseee emen 176 Rep iIS 5 oereecees tee AI AN a a Aa AAN aa S 192 Response time sssssssseeee emen 19 249 Retrofitting oreet re rr IR a da e kx adde 192 S safe operati n eet peau qe vu aha cured 15 Safety zNotes tied tv tte db diee bep tees 3 Segment coupler sainan a 172 224 segment coupler FOCITEX agnoverunt 182 OC11EX system design eeeee ee 184 SCI2Ex system design eseeeemeene 176 dd MEER 15 Shielding es onera fe reef rfe eris 199 200 Slot IP20 COVOl 2i iue eleme iiem 48 256 Switch S ROAY echec nei bates qul pedis 36 223 Symbols cede tU BE ERI IER 14 Syste m approval twats Re dae e e Pe a RS 212 T Technical data AIAOTEX Eee situe IEIUNIA ASEN 89 AIHAOEX AIHATEX semen 113 SAO4OTV dM 108 AOEBAOEX kni enian anene eee te iste iare ni Peter 135 sq EET 157 DOADQOEX icc ehe rn e De ii 85 cue 68 Module rack e etr eder n oh de de 20 zPSD24EYX eie pre p erp TRO EA Er ee ERE 41 Stainless steel field enclosure sssssssss 201 technical data PLZ 61 OC11Ex 2G and OC11EX 3G ssssseeeee 189 BSQI2EXe etu EL MS Hee 181 294 Terminals bl cs dte ct Pob n resa ON Gaels 192
263. tes ttts ntis no ttts ntt nott noie tts netto nonc 120 Error message via the status bit of the data telegram eese tette ttt tentes nite notttts noctis 121 Floating point format of the HART variable eese tenente nn tttts nettes tetto tttt notis ttts notte nonis 122 Measurement ranges sese eteetenntenttenntnnttnnnenns 123 Connection figures 123 Parameters sse 124 Channel specific module diagnosis 128 Function of the LEDS 129 Technical data ete e nete puente etude eee e ee ipee ee AA te Re 130 AOHAOEx analog output module 4 channel 0 eeccsessssescssssscssssccseccssccsscccsscccsseccsueccsnecssnecessecessecessensecsscecenecesneecsueessneecsneessaes 131 Configuration and data volume esnada iE tentent tts tte notion tts ns E a A sonos 131 Floating point format of the HART variables eese tete tete tette ntte notte tts notte nonet nette nettes nonis 132 misc Iriusiadelecap D 133 Connection figures xs n ae ed ente netos te tete e ao ett eese eti ete beret die 134 mig iCuliice e EEr 135 Channel specific module diagnosis eee eeenn ttes tte notte netto notet tts nott non tts ns ttt no ttts nonis 138 a Function of the LEDs eerte tete ee pires peret fen ee ee testet edet energie e dd ee terae 138
264. that a module can only be replaced with a module ofthe same type Coding is done with special coding pins with 6 points that are plugged into the respective recesses on the module rack Each slot has 4 recesses of which only 2 can be used The other 2 are used for type coding Ex module or non ex module When supplied to the customer each module has 2 coded pins Figure 62 Coding pin p Hu f h positions on the O S iti O n O t e module Coding Non Ex module Coding 1 Coding 2 Coding 3 Coding 4 Coding 5 S Q OQ Coding 6 Coding Non Ex module D301266 0113 excom coding pins PX Coding Ex module Coding Ex module 169 excom system components Table 146 Mechanical coding of the I O modules 170 Factory provided coding right Coding to be done on module rack by with delivery the user GDP IS 1 4 1 4 GDP NI 4 1 1 4 DM80Ex 1 4 3 6 DI40Ex 2 5 3 6 DO401Ex 2 5 2 5 Al401Ex 4 2 Al41Ex 2 5 4 1 Al43Ex 3 6 5 2 A0401 Ex 1 4 2 5 AIHAOEx 2 5 5 2 AIH41Ex 3 6 4 1 AOHAOEx 3 6 2 5 TI40Ex 1 4 4 1 TI41Ex 4 1 4 1 DF20Ex 4 6 PSM24 3G 6 3 6 3 D301266 0113 excom 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 2 6 4 2 7 4 2 8 4 2 9 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 Industr A excom bus components Segment
265. the respective funciton block remains at the last valid value A Direction recognition forward f 4 kHz Host controlled f 4 kHz Terminal f 4 kHz Terminal auto f gt 1 25 kHz forward Direction recognition forward Host controlled Direction recognition is set via the up down control bit Terminal The direction recognition is controlled statically via the input of the direction recognition of Channel 3 and 4 Terminal auto The direction recognition is controlled dynamically via the measurement inputs of Channel 3 and 4 Measurement cycle 300 ms 0 1 96 resolution lt 50 ms 1 resolution Setting of the measurement cylce and the resulting accuracy Average value off Number of the scanning intervals for determing 4 values the average value 8 values 16 values De chattering off Activation deactivation of the additional Control inputs 50 ms dampening of the input signals Polarity normal Activation or deactivation of the inversion of the inverted direction of the signal D301266 0113 excom Frequency counter module 3 11 3 DF20Ex P counter module Industr A In this configuration the module sends a double value with count and status for each function block Counter input The following table shows a raw value display for the function block A Table 138 Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Raw val
266. the TI41Ex 8 TI41Ex Input module D301266 0113 excom 149 excom system components The following table displays the assignment of the individual bits of the input word e g of the first channel Table 128 Bit position of the input word of the n th channel Bit assignment of the input word Bit15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit O SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 30000 equates to 0 to 3000 K Bit position of the measurement value 0 30000 equates to 0 to 3000 K SB Bit position of the measurement value 0 30000 equates to 0 to 3000 K SB Status Bit n 1 2 3 014 The numerical value 0 30000 represents 0 to 3000 K Kelvin For conversion into Celsius C the following formula is valid 0 C 273 15 K From the numerical value the temperature can be calculated into Celsius C with the following formula Numerical value 2731 5 Temperature in C C 10 Error message via status bit of the data telegram Note o The module sends an error message via the status bit of the data telegram when an error occurs The status bit is set when an infringement of the measurement range and a cable error occur Thus a consistent error evaluation of the measurement value can be done Table 129 Sensor in K In C in K In C Measurement ranges of the Pt100 IEC 73 200 1123 850 temperat
267. the redundancy concepts can be realized in the same way than with the SC12Ex Here is an example of two possibilities of how the interface can be used to create a redundancy connection Version 1 gateway redundancy and line redundancy provides gateway and line redundancy With Version 2 continuous redundancy however a continuous redundancy up to the gateway is represented in which an error does not lead to data loss Figure 74 Version 1 gateway redundancy and line redundancy D301266 0113 Non Ex area Master Ex area zone 2 max distance between the fibre optic couplers 2 5 km fibre optic connection Ex area zone 1 DP connector DP connector with integrated terminating resistor excom Profibus Link interface cl Cc excom f see ell TERETE RS485 IS 187 excom bus components Figure 75 Version 2 continuous redundancy 188 Non Ex area 1 Redundancy 2 connection Ex area zone 2 max distance between the fibre optic couplers 2 5 km QVO QV fibre optic connection Ex area zone 1 DP connector DP connector with integrated terminating resistor optional 0
268. the requirements of protection class IP65 and above D301266 0113 excom 53 excom system components 3 4 5 Module rack accessories To connect the field devices to the signal connection layer of the excom system MINI COMBICON terminals are used which can be populated either with terminal blocks that can be mounted with screws or that have cage clamp technolgy terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU set with 16 pieces 4 pole terminal block screw terminals blue Figure 27 Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 BU Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU Set with 16 pieces 4 pole terminal block cage clamp terminals blue Figure 28 Terminal block STB16 4RC 1 5 BU 54 D301266 0113 excom Gateway GDP IS head station Industr A 3 5 Gateway GDP IS head station Figure 29 Gateway GDP IS General information The excom gateway GDP IS is an intrinsically safe gateway for PROFIBUS DPV1 It connects the excom stations to the higer level PROFIBUS fieldbus system and controls the entire data communication In addition the gateway provides the entire diagnosis including channel specific diagnosis Manufacturer specific error codes are also generated This includes for example HART communication errors power supply unit errors or power supply module errors planning errors as well as information via simulation internal communication redundancy switching etc Note When excom gateways are used in
269. the respective hardware configurator of the host system This guarantees that the PROFIBUS DP master is supplied with information and data sets valid for excom when configuration takes place D301266 0113 excom 55 excom system components Configuration via GSD files The gateway GDP IS also has GSD files They are available in German and English Use of GSD files page 245 The difference between GSD file versions 1 6 x and 2 0 x involves the use or rather the support of DPV1 specific functions and key words e g those that are used with PNO redundancy implementation Gateway redundancy When two gateways and two bus cables are used uninterruptable communication is guaranteed even when one gateway and one bus cable fail If a gateway fails a bumpless switch to the second gateway takes place this corresponds to line redundancy The system redundancy two Masters connected to one gateway via their own segment couplers is also supported Note o By using suitable host systems the configuration can be changed during operation Function of the LEDs With the help of the 5 front side LEDs status operating mode internal or rather external communication redundancy status and system configuration are displayed Here is an overview of the LED functions Table 14 LED Functions 56 LED Behavior Function Status green Ready for operation off Not ready for operation no supply CAN y
270. tion bolt ees im ELST M20Ex plastic design ELVA M20ExX stainless Steel ER Module rack accessories ttteeeorte tenente eria ddsevsasavsovschoiesdascatgusansuelededessded assbesanne cats S Naaien Ei a EEN a iaa D301266 0113 excom 23 excom system components 3 5 3 7 3 7 1 3 8 3 8 1 24 terminal Block STB16 4RS 1 5 BW 2 rtc tee tet tee e ce EE ERE cases itu E Pete ete Re tue PES 54 Terminal block STB16 4RS 1 5 BU wicccicccsssssssssssssesscsscsssssssssssssssssssessssessesssssssscssssssssessssssssssssssssssussessessessesessessesssssesssssessesssees 54 Gateway GDP IS head station eee eee eere etes eee ee eee ee ee ete no sooo sea eaae eet o asses see eee ee eese sese sese eese eno 55 General informatioH iced a tete dudes pci tendit e cH eee nete ere eO eR pue Cut Cette eaaa Stiaan Connection to higher level systems Configuration via GSD files sss k Gateway redundancy suionnuirierini n a a A a A a a i i kaa Function Of the LEDS M Q Special error scenarios with corresponding LED displays sssssssssssssessesssssssssreseesssesssssessesseessesssssessteereeesessssssesteoressesssssset 57 Gateway diagnosis Parameters Technical data Gateway GDP NI head station 05505 550005 000s8009000001008000 9 de isss H M 62 EX
271. tion class Ex ib IIC Max values of each terminal pair U 4 2 V Max values of the sum of the terminal pairs I 48A Cables cable type A or rather B per EN 60079 25 L R lt 15 uH Q loop resistance C lt 250 nF km Flexible wire diameter 20 2mm concentrated inductances and capacities in the fieldbus system path are not permitted D301266 0113 excom 61 excom system components 3 6 Gateway GDP NI head station Figure 30 gateway GDP NI 62 General information The excom gateway GDP NI is a gateway for PROFIBUS with RS485 standard interface Use only when mounted in non ex areas N 2 Non Ex The separation point to the intrinsically safe part of the system is integrated in the gateway I isolated The segment coupler is not needed The gateway controls the connection of the excom stations to the higher level PROFIBUS fieldbus system as well as the entire data communication In addition the gateway provides the entire diagnosis including channel specific diagnosis Manufacturer specific error codes are also generated This includes for example HART communication errors power supply module failures planning errors as well as information via simulation internal communication redundancy switches etc Note When excom gateways are used in existing installations with redundant bus coupling it must be ensured that both gateways have the same hardware and firmware
272. to the output module The gateway that communicates with the secondary master ignores the sent output data 230 D301266 0113 excom Redundancy monitoring Industr A 6 6 Redundancy monitoring The gateway has an input word as well as an output word to monitor redundancy if it is configured in the control system as GDP C The input word describes the current status of the gateways the output word is used to force a redundancy switch This information can be used to monitor redundancy with the help of a self defined logic in the control system The logic can be defined in such a way for example that the process values of the inputs and or outputs of the I O modules are frozen for a defined period of time when an intended or unintended switch takes place 6 6 1 Input word for the current status of the gateways The status of the respective gateways is stored in the input word If the one line redundancy is configured the active gateway only sends its status With a system redundancy both gateways send their status to the respective PROFIBUS masters Table 161 Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit1 Bit 0 Structure of the input word Byte 0 not assigned supply module Gateway Slot active status redundancy passive Byte 1 not assigned Table 162 Slot active passive Meaning Possible status Bit 1 Bit 0 messages via the input word 0 0 Gateway in the right s
273. ts ttt nto ttt notte nott tts nonton tts notti notti notis notis e THIS Terra Hi elle ET ee I MM Structure of the alarm component sscssscsssscsseessssccssecsescesseeesssecsssccescccsueecsuecssnscessessssecsssessasecsssescesecesseesaseessuecesnecsaeessneessnseesees Error codes per PROFIBUS DP standard Manufacturer specific error codes eese eene tnnt ttnnt ttes ttto ntt nott aas Redundancy status with line redundancy and system redundancy Dependance of bus length from the baud rate eee Lees e eee eee eee eee eee esee esses esee esee esses esos eene 245 ITYoEcH nil T P 245 Data formats with excom ecce eee eee eee ee eee eee eee esee esee esee eese eaae esee esee esee esses sess osse s ose s osse osse s sssssssoe Data formats of the digital modules Data formats of the analog modules uuu Configuration of a 247 Configuration of the Gateway ssscsssssssssssssssssssssssescessessssseesssssesssusessesussesuusessusseseensescennssesuuessssuusescessesesuneescesseseesnseesuneesensneeesssees 247 Configuration of the I O MOCUIES ssssccssssecssssscesssscessssecssssecssssscessssessnssecsssseecssssecssssessssseeesssneeesssscesnssecsnsnscessssessnseceesnseseenseeees 248 Determination of the transmission rate and cycle time eeeee eee eene
274. tured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the Al401Ex module supports channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 With the parameter Short circuit monitoring page 270 and Wire breakage monitoring page 270 the respective diagnsotic messages can be suppressed Table 53 Error code No Meaning Error codes Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage 2 Undercontrol 3 Overcontrol Specific 16 Cable error 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent Function of the LEDs Table 54 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for the slot green Correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data Channel off No channel error red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present 90 D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Technical data Industr A Table 55 Type code Al401Ex Technical data Al401Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module Power consumption lt 2 2W Inputs 4 analog sensors
275. tute value strategy wire breakage monitoring and short circuit monitoring In addition the user can determine whether an input or an output is available for each respective connection point Configurations of 8 inputs outputs 6 inputs 2 outputs up to 0 inputs 8 outputs are possible Thus an optimal adjustment to the respective application environment is guaranteed Configuration and data volume Depending on the application the I O module DM80Ex can be configured as a true input card with or without additional status on the one hand and as an input and output card all channels are parameterized in pairs as input or output on the other hand When configuration with status takes place the bit of the respective channel is set to 1 in the status byte while a status message is pending Short circuit or wire breakage are possible causes for setting of this status bit D301266 0113 excom 69 excom system components Depending on the configuration the data volume is different The following configurations are possible Table 28 Input byte Output byte Type Configuration Configuration of the DM80Ex 1 1 DM80Ex bidirectional DM80Ex without status 2 1 DMB80Ex S bidirectional DM80 Ex with status 1 0 DMB8OEx 8l DM80Ex as true input module without status 2 0 DMS8OEx S 8l DMB80Ex as true input module with status Note o The module hardware is identical despit
276. ual bits of the output byte Table 44 Bit position of the output byte Bit assignment of the output byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit O Output byte Ch 4 Ch 3 Ch 2 Ch 1 Connection figures Figure 36 Terminal terminal configuration connection possibilities Selectable assignment i 11 E ka DO401Ex ie 1X channel 1 Uo lt 25 0 V H Lui is Dui i Lui 22 ie channel 2 umi i 5 D 24 i X j 24 Ug 19 0 V Lu 32 Me channel 3 Lum ie mi 34 li D ov ie ial 42 Uf 2 channel 4 LI Up lt 25 0 V je _ a Dr 82 D301266 0113 excom Digital modules Industr A Parameters Note Refer to the bit assignment DO401Ex page 269 Parameterization is done per channel Table 45 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameters for DO401Ex Short circuit on Short circuit monitoring is activated or deactivated monitoring off depending on channels In case of a short circuit the respective channel LED is red The output signal can only be monitored when the output is triggered Wire breakage on Wire breakage monitoring is activated or monitoring off deactivated depending on channels In case of a wire breakage the respective channel LED is red The output signal can only be monitored when the output is triggered Substitute value min value Depending on the parameterization the min strategy max value value the max value or the last valid value is set
277. ue display block A 1 Valence 2 230 229 228 227 226 225 2 Meaning S OV VZ Count 2 Valence 223 22 2 220 219 218 2 216 Meaning Count 3 Valence 2 5 24 25 212 2 210 2 28 Meaning Count 4 Valence 27 2 2 24 23 2 2 2 Meaning Count S measurement status E Q valid measurement value E 1 invalid measurement value OV overflow E 0 no overflow E 1 Overflow VZ prefix E 0 Measurement value positive E 1 Measurement value negative Negative counts are transmitted as two s complement VZ 1 and must be changed for display The display can also be used for funciton block B In this case bytes 4 to 7 are assigned Input to determin count direction In addition to the measurement input there is an input to determine the count direction Depending on parameterization via the host system the determination of the count direction is evaluated statically or dynamically The dynamic determination of the count direction reduces the max measurement frequency to 1 25 kHz Static evaluation When the input signal is evaluated statically the logic 0 means upward count and the logic 1 downward count D301266 0113 excom 161 excom system components Dynamic evaluation With dynamic evaluation the determination of the count direction is done via the phase position between the measurement input and the output for determining the count direction The following drawing explains the principle
278. ue value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value The min value is 0 mA for 0 20 mA and 3 6 mA for 4 20 mA Measurement range 0 20 mA Depending on parameterization the measurement 4 20 mA range is set to 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA or rather 0 10V 0 10 V or 2 10 V 2 10 V Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 65 29 25 Depending on the measurement range the following substitute values are set when a error occurs Table 59 Measurement range Substitute values Substitute values for Al41Ex Oto 20 mA Min value 0 mA Max value 21 mA 4 to 20 mA Min value 3 6 mA Max value 21 mA Oto 10V Min value 0 V Max value 10 5 V 2to 10V Min value 1 8 V Max value 10 5 V D301266 0113 excom 95 excom system components Channel specific module diagnosis The diagnostic data are structured per IEC 61158 Type 1 3 10 Next to the module status device specific diagnosis and the status overview identification specific diagnosis the Al41Ex module supports channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 With the parameter Cable monitoring page 271 the respective diagnsotic messages can be suppressed Table 60 Error code Meaning Error codes Standard Short circuit Wire breakage Undercontrol Overcontrol
279. uit lt 5Q Wire breakage 500 Q Input thermal elements Types B E D G J K L N R S T and U Wire breakage lt 100nA 2 150 mV Resolution Linearity error 16 bit lt 0 05 96 from end value Temperature drift Rise time fall time lt 0 005 K lt 200 ms 10 90 Ex approval PTB 00 ATEX 2181 Marking 912 1 G Ex ib ia ICT4 11 1 D Ex ia IIIC Ex max values field circuits Ex ia IIC IIB Connection to passive field Connection to active device e g measurement field device e g resistances thermal elements Open circuit voltage U lt 55V lt 1 2V Short circuit current I lt 25 mA 50mA Max power P 35 mW 60mW Characteristic curve linear Max internal inductance L negligible negligible Max internal capacity C 60 nF negligible IIC IIB IIC IIB Max external inductance Lo mH C pF C pF C uF C pF capacity Lo Co 2 0 2 6 15 1 6 9 8 1 0 2 9 17 1 9 12 0 5 3 6 21 2 3 14 0 2 4 5 27 3 0 19 General information Galvanic isolation galvanic isolation per EN 60079 11 on all sides Protection class IP20 Ambient temperature 20 70 C Relative humidity 95 at 55 C per EN 60069 2 Vibration test and shock test per IEC 60068 2 6 and IEC 60068 2 27 148 D301266 0113 excom Modules for temperature measuring Industr A 3 10 2 TI41Ex temper
280. ule has 4 inputs to access 3 wire potentiometers or 4 wire potentiometers The input circuits are galvanically isolated from each other from the supply voltage as well as the internal bus Figure 42 Terminal terminal configuration connection possibilities selectable assignment 14 1i Al43Ex 12 12 n channel 1 13 N R 4L 13 N ipm 14 i Ji sls LE m umi 22 22 m channel 2 R 3L 28 23 24 N N s mw Hez mt channel 3 33 R 3L 33 34 Dm L 7t A zh A Bind A NM ala V channel 4 43 N R 4L i A KR A T 100 D301266 0113 excom Analog modules Industr A Parameters Note Please take the bit assignment Al43Ex page 272 Table 65 Parameter name Value Meaning Parameter for Al43Ex Cable monitoring on Cable monitoring is activated or deactivated off Substitue value strategy min value Depending on the parameterization the min max value value the max value or the last valid value is set last valid value Filter PT1 off Activation of a software filter to generate an 0 1s average value 2 6 S 29 25 When an error occurs the following min and max substitute values are set Table 66 Measurement range Substitute values Substitute values for Al43Ex O to 100 96 Min value 0 96 Max value 1
281. uration ok blinking red Configuration error missing or wrongly plugged modules D301266 0113 excom 63 excom system components Special error scenarios with corresponding LED displays Table 22 LED Behavior Possible source of error PROFIBUS Error Status green no communication with PROFIBUS excom address wrong CAN yellow double assignment to PROFIBUS participants PDP red no bus termination defective cabling PRIO yellow redundancy status Config off Table 23 LED Behavior Possible source of error No internal communication Status green no internal communication no modules plugged CAN red Module does not interfere with the internal PDP yellow communication bus PRIO yellow redundancy status Config blinking red Table 24 LED Behavior Possible source of error Configuration error Status green no modules plugged module in wrong position CAN yellow modules are not correctly plugged into the rack PDP yellow modules are not parameterized PRIO yellow redundancy status Config blinking red 64 D301266 0113 excom Gateway GDP NI head station Industr A Gateway diagnosis The gateway also provides manufacturer specific error codes next to standard diagnoses For example these are power supply module errors planning errors internal communication redundancy switches
282. ure SEO Pt100 UIS 73 200 1123 850 Pt100 SAMA 73 200 1123 850 Pt100 GOST 73 200 1173 850 Ni100 213 60 523 250 Cu100 213 50 1123 200 150 A The GOST characteristic curve is only partially supported D301266 0113 excom Modules for temperature measuring Industr A Connection figures Figure 53 Terminal terminal configuration connection possibilities selectable assignment TI41Ex B E N channel 1 RTH 4L w V X V channel 2 RTH 3L 7T sse I i N gt 7 7 w channel 3 RTH 2L U V V channel 4 RTH 4L JV U D301266 0113 excom 151 excom system components Parameters 0t Please take the bit assignment TI41Ex page 289 Table 130 Parameter for TI41Ex 152 Parameter name Value Sensor type Pt100 IEC Pt100 JIS Pt100 SAMA Ni100 Pt100 GOST reserved CU100 reserved Setting of sensor type Connection 2 wire 0 Q Basis 2 wire 8 Q Basis 3 wire 4 wire Connection technology 2 wire 3 wire etc Filter PT1 off 0 1s 2 65 29 25 Activation of a software filter to generate an average value Short circuit monitoring on off Short circuit monitoring is activated or deactivated Wire breakage monitoring on off Short circuit monitoring is activated or deactivated
283. us The module has the protection class Ex ib IIC and can thus be used in connection with the system excom in Zone 1 The ignition protection class of the inputs is Ex ia IIC Note The 4 inputs are galvanically isolated from each other Each potentiometer input is monitored for wire breakage The interruption of an individual connection cable as well as the arbitrary combination of interruptions of the 4 connection cables of an input will be reliably recogized Short circuit monitoring does not take place After a cable error has occurred the parameterized substitute value is issued immediately and the Invalid bit of the output value is set This condition remains until valid measurement values are present again The behavior of the inputs is parameterized via the PROFIBUS DP master Possible parameters are subsitute value strategy line monitoring and input delay The resolution has 14 bit For simple presentation 0 100 96 is translated to the digitalized value 0 10000 independent from the parameterization of the measurement range and sent to the host system Configuration and data volume The AI43Ex operates as a true input card with additional status bit for each channel When a status message is pending the status bit of the respective channel is set to 1 in the input word depending on the display in Bit 15 or Bit O The status bit is set when an error occurs that initiates a diagnostic message The analog value of 0 1
284. us category ib should not be capable of causing ignition under normal operating conditions in the event of a single fault Intrinsic safety must be ensured even when a fault occurs Any apparatus in category ib must have all components used to limit the electrical energy and protective parts in duplicate Verification of intrinsic safety According to EN 60079 14 it is required to document and confirm that intrinsic safety is maintained when interconnecting intrinsically safe apparatus and associated equipment Temperature class The temperature class specifies the maximum allowable surface temperature of an apparatus Here the explosion protected apparatus can be approved for different temperature classes a decision which depends on technical and financial considerations Thus the lowest possible temperature classification in dependence on the type of protection is usually related with challenging techniques and accordingly high expenses Intrinsically safe products are comparably more efficient and cheaper Only intrinsically safe equipment that is directly installed in D301266 0113 excom Industr A explosion hazardous areas requires temperature classification For associated apparatus this classification is not needed A Zone 0 Zone 0 comprises locations in which a dangerous explosive atmosphere is present continuously or frequently Likelyhood of the occurrence of an ignitable mixture constantly for long periods
285. valid value The output value of the respective funciton block remains at the last valid value A Detection of the direction forward f 4 kHz Host controlled f 4 kHz Terminal f 4 kHz Terminal auto f 1 25 kHz forward Direction recognition forward Host controlled Direction recognition is set via the up down control bit Terminal The direction recognition is controlled statically via the input of the direction recognition of Channel 3 and 4 Terminal auto The direction recognition is controlled dynamically via the measurement inputs of Channel 3 and 4 A Reset counter Host controlled Terminal The counter is either controlled by the host or reset via the terminal A Edge count rising rising falling Parameterization of the edge count Only rising or falling edges are counted A Release Host controlled Terminal Parameterization of the release of the counter Controlled by the terminal or the host A Measurement range 100 Hz 0 1 kHz 0 4 kHz Select measurement range D301266 0113 excom Frequency counter module Industr A Table 142 cont Parameter for DF20Ex P Parameter name Value Meaning A De chattering off Activation deactivation of the additional Control inputs 50 ms dampening of the input signals A1 A4 Polarity normal Activation or deactivation of the inversion of the inverted direct
286. verview identification specific diagnosis the TI40Ex devices support the following channel status messages channel specific diagnosis also refer to Diagnoses per EN 61158 page 233 Table 124 Error code No Meaning Error codes Standard 1 Short circuit 6 Wire breakage 7 Upper limit value exceeded 8 Lower limit value has not been reached Specific 19 Module type Should configuration unknown 20 Module type Is configuration unknown 22 Parameter not plausible inconsistent Function of the LEDs Table 125 LED Behavior Function LED diagnosis Status off No voltage supply red blinking Module is not configured for this slot green correct operation green blinking The module is not yet configured by the gateway and waits for configuration data Channel off No channel error red Channel error wire breakage short circuit channel diagnosis present D301266 0113 excom 147 excom system components Technical data Table 126 Type code TI40Ex Technical data TI40Ex Supply voltage via the module rack central power supply unit or power supply module internal power consumption lt 1W Inputs 4 x 2 3 4 wire resistance thermometer Input resistance thermometer Pt100 Pt200 Pt400 Pt1000 Ni100 Cu100 Cable resistance 4 wire 500 3 wire 100 2 wire lt 5Q Resolution 16 bit Short circ
287. x value 10 last valid value 6 7 Cable monitoring 00 on 11 off 1 Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 2 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 3 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 4 reserved 00000000 272 D301266 0113 excom AO401Ex Industr A A 9 AO401Ex Table 201 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameters for No AO401 0 Parameter for Channel 1 2 Measurement range 00 0 20 mA 01 4 20 mA 3 reserved 0 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring 0 on 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0 on 1 off Parameter for Channel 2 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 Parameter for Channel 3 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 Parameter for Channel 4 bit assignment analog to Channel 1 reserved 00000000 BR Ww N D301266 0113 excom 273 Addendum parameters A 10 AIH40Ex Table 202 Byte Bit No Parameter name Parameter values Parameter for No AIH40Ex 0 Parameter for Channel 1 0 1 Filter PT1 00 off 01 0 1s 10 2 6s 11 29 2 s 2 3 HART status measurement 00 off 0 20 mA range 01 off 4 20 mA 10 on 4 20 mA 4 5 Substitute value strategy 00 min value 01 max value 10 last valid value 6 Wire breakage monitoring O on 1 off 7 Short circuit monitoring 0
288. y System redundancy off Gateway without redundancy function Line redundancy Flying redundancy System redundancy System redundancy Power supply module simple With redundant supply via two power supply redundant units PSD24Ex or power supply modules PSM24 3G the power supply module diagnosis is activated with the redundant setting HCIR active off Activation of online configuration on Note This bit must be set with the master before the HCIR sequence starts HCIR WCBC factor Basis x 1 Factor for generating the max switching time Basis x 10 between old and new configuration The configuration can be changed by module replacement hot swapping and configuration expansion configuration in Run during operation During the switching time the outputs are held at the current value HCIR WCBC Basis 0 63 Determines the basis for the switching time x 100 ms Default 5 When the PROFIBUS master supports HCIR this parameter is set automatically Address Offset off Activation of the Address Offset with curve on redundancy D301266 0113 excom Gateway GDP NI head station Industr A Table 26 cont Parameters Gateway Parameter name Value Meaning Offset value 0 124 Address Offset to generate a virtual address for Default 0 the redundant gateway Standard value 0 CAN redundancy off Redundancy of the internal communication on between gateway and I Os SF2
289. y blinking 27 R SWITCH OVER 2 R GW MISSING The redundant gateway is missing Table 183 active gateway passive gateway Error code active gateway Redundancy Status R GW PRIO LED blinking 28 MISSING 3 R NOT READY The redundant gateway is not ready Table 184 active gateway passive gateway Error code active gateway Redundancy PRIO LED blinking PDP LED red 29 Status R NOT READY 4 R GW ERROR The redundant gateway is present but an error is present as well Table 185 active gateway passive gateway Error code active gateway Redundancy Status R GW PRIO LED blinking PDP LED red 30 ERROR 5 R NO DF The redundant gateway has no PROFIBUS communication e g caused by HSA Highest Station Address too small physical connection is defective etc Table 186 active gateway passive gateway Error code active gateway Redundancy Status R GW PRIO LED blinking PDP LED red 31 ERROR 244 D301266 0113 excom Dependance of bus length from the baud rate Industr A 6 8 Dependance of bus length from the baud rate The following table shows the max permittable length of the bus cable or of abus segment depending on the baud rate Table 187 Baudrate in kBit s 9 6 19 2 45 45 93 75 187 5 500 1500 Baud rate and bus length Bus segment 1200 1200 1200 1200 1000 400 200 Length of the bus cable in m For Automatic Baud Rate R
290. y so that the respective requirements are met Each module the gateway to the higher level fieldbus as well as the power supply unit or the power supply module are part of a separate approval Their use is only permitted in connection with the module racks Instructions for installation The power supply units or the power supply modules gateways and the I O modules are plugged into the respective slots on the module rack They must snap into the brackets in a way that can be clearly felt The power supply units or the power supply modules must be screwed tight Note Power supply units or power supply modules gateways and the I O modules can be hot swapped even in Zone 1 or Zone 21 Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by electric shock 230 115 VAC converters must only be replaced when the voltage supply has been disconnected Here a 5 minute waiting period must be observed Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by explosion Intrinsically safe components that were connected to non intrinsically safe current circuits at one time must no longer be used as operating equipment with intrinsically safe current circuits Danger Possible injuries to persons caused by damaged components Damaged components or components with suspected damage must no longer be used These components must be marked accordingly or remove the Ex relevant identification D301266 0113 excom Installation of excom in t

User manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents